JP2019213934A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine, when a pachinko hall blacks out by losing power, served as a mark for evacuating players to the outside of a concourse and the pachinko hall.SOLUTION: The game machine is configured to display an image for transmitting to prompt a player to operate a depressing operation part of an operation unit, on a display area of a liquid crystal display device 1900 and, when the player operates the depression operation part of the operation unit for progressing a specific performance, power generated by a piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit by the operation is charged to an electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of a frame decoration drive amplifier 194. Accordingly, when a pachinko hall blacks out by losing power, the power charged by the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194 is discharged and supplied to color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400 so as to be able to emit light of the color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 116

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine that outputs an audio signal amplified to a level corresponding to a volume set by a volume to a speaker (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-30651 A

  By the way, when the gaming machine is operated to reduce the volume by turning down the volume in order to play a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormal state to a hall clerk or the like from the speaker, the notification sound is added to the volume of the production sound. There is a problem in that the volume is also reduced, and it is difficult for a store clerk or the like to notice the occurrence of an abnormal state.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and a purpose of the present invention is to make it difficult for a clerk or the like in a hall to notice the occurrence of an abnormal state due to the notification sound even when the volume of the production sound is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing such a situation.

  The following are effective solutions for achieving the above object. The operation and the like will be described as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are also shown as appropriate, but are not limited in any way.

(Solution 1)
A plurality of sound output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state to the gaming machine, and a staging sound due to the progress of the game,
Effect display means,
First volume adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means;
Effect control means for controlling the audio output means and the effect display means according to schedule data extracted based on an effect command from the main control means,
A second volume adjustment unit different from the first volume adjustment unit that can adjust a volume output from the audio output unit;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery start condition,
Based on the lottery result of the lottery means, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special game state in which a profit is given to a player and that can discharge game balls to the outside,
Of the first volume adjustment unit and the second volume adjustment unit, the first volume adjustment unit is an adjustment unit that cannot be operated by a player,
The effect control means,
Production sound volume adjustment control means for setting the volume of the production sound in accordance with the operation of the first volume adjustment means,
In the special game state, effect sound volume change control means for changing the sound volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means according to the operation of the second volume adjustment means,
When the initialization condition is satisfied, effect sound initialization control means for setting the sound volume of the effect sound changed by the effect sound volume change control means to an initial volume independent of the setting of the player,
Notification sound volume adjustment control means for setting the volume of the notification sound for notifying the abnormal state to the gaming machine in the abnormality notification period based on the abnormal state without depending on the volume set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means When,
Sound output execution control means for executing control to output the effect sound and the notification sound from the sound output means,
When the abnormality notification period occurred during the game, the progress of the sound generation schedule data of the effect sound output from the audio output unit was continued without stopping according to the sound generation schedule data of the schedule data. When the volume is changed to mute in the state, and the abnormal notification period elapses after a predetermined period, the mute is set to mute after the abnormal notification period occurs, and the progress is continued according to the sound generation schedule data. If the sound volume of the effect sound has been changed by the effect sound volume change control means in response to an operation on the second volume adjusting means before the occurrence of the abnormality notification period, the effect sound volume change control means sets By setting the volume to be restored to the previously set volume, the effect sound whose volume is set to mute in response to the occurrence of the abnormality notification period Are configured to be restored in a predetermined time advanced state from being changed set to mute,
The notification sound volume adjustment control means,
A state in which the effect sound volume adjustment control means sets the sound volume of the effect sound low in response to the operation of the first volume adjustment means, or the effect sound volume change control means responds to the operation of the second volume adjustment means. In a state in which the volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means has been changed to a smaller volume, a larger volume than the volume of the effect sound is set as the volume of the notification sound,
When a new abnormality occurs in the abnormality notification period, and even after the end of the abnormality notification period due to the notification of the previous abnormality, if the abnormality notification period due to the occurrence of the new abnormality continues, Without restoring the volume of the production sound, the progress of the sound generation schedule data of the production sound is continued while the production sound is muted until the abnormality notification period due to the new abnormality ends,
The sound output execution control means,
In the abnormal notification period, the notification sound and the effect sound whose sound has been muted are synthesized, and the notification sound is output so as to be audible.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk of the hall or the like from noticing the occurrence of the abnormal state by the notification sound.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame that constitute the pachinko gaming machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support bracket of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) viewed from below. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the effect | action of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from back and disassembled. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit after disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side decoration unit after disassembly. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear surface perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the plate unit. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the operation unit from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where a pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the handle device in the door frame and disassembled after. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front cover by disassembling the foul cover unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit in the door frame after disassembling it. It is a front view showing the state where the front cover of the foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the rear case removed and viewed from the rear. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | system of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main-body frame. It is a back perspective view of a main part frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front by exploding. It is the perspective view which looked at after disassembling a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main part frame base in a main part frame. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a hit ball launching device in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit ball launching device in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball unit from the disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball unit after disassembly. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in a disassembled manner and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball apparatus in the prize ball unit later and disassembled. It is a rear view showing the relation between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear surface perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in a main part frame. FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the board unit from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the board unit. (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors and the sliding rod for main-body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main-body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the game board. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 89 and the like, viewed from the front. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind in FIG. 92. FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of a game panel of the game board of FIG. 92, which is cut in a vertical direction. It is a detailed front view of a game board. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board shown in FIG. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a launch control input circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a drive circuit of a firing solenoid. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram illustrating a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating characteristics of a DC / DC converter. 112 is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the driving circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 112. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a frame decoration drive amplifier board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 118 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 118. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 121. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payment control part. 125 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit in FIG. 124. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball release switch operation determination process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket home position determination skip process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a ball flare judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for a ball rental. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball | ball removal setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball movement setting process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a retry operation monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation switch operation judging processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing at the time of the payout operation | movement by ball lending (A), and the input signal confirmation processing from a CR unit (A). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a rotation detection switch history creation process. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches in accordance with a clockwise rotation of a dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches in accordance with a counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. (A) is a table showing ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches in accordance with the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotary operation unit, and (B) is a table accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit. FIG. 5 is a list showing ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram (range toward the maximum value side) illustrating the operation of an initial value update type counter. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram (range toward the minimum value side) illustrating the operation of an initial value update type counter. It is a figure showing an example when a big hit game state occurs. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of continuation when the big hit gaming state in FIG. 154 occurs.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment, and a door frame is opened with respect to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame that constitute the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main body frame, and the like that constitute the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the game board and a door frame as viewed from the front.

  1 to 7, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 to open and close the front side. A game board 4 having a box frame-shaped body frame 3, a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a front face of the body frame 3 and the game board 4. And a door frame 5 pivotally supported on the body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable so as to be closed from the user side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a gaming ball disposed below the gaming window 101 for storing gaming balls. It has a dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed such that, when viewed from the front, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending vertically, and each has a lateral width in the left-right direction. Are substantially the same size, and the size of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. At a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, a decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 move forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to be in an open state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 when viewed from the front, and protrudes forward below the game window 101. , Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for a player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the player rotates the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that the player can play a game.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player cannot view the inside of the game area 1100. It is configured such that a hand or the like cannot be inserted to touch a game ball, an obstacle nail, various prize holes, an accessory, or the like in the game area 1100. On the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a closed or bar body 1250 is provided so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper support of the main frame and the upper support of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support member of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction and left and right upper and lower frame plates 11 extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. Side frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. 13 are connected to each other to form a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness, and penetrate vertically at substantially the center of both left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engagement notch 15 recessed toward the center in the left-right direction is provided. In addition, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, a mounting step 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step 10a. It has become.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, aluminum alloy) having a fixed cross section, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end. The protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by the user's finger, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there are some drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-like horizontal piece 17, a plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the up-down direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12, 13, and extending in a direction opposite to the vertical piece 18 A plate-shaped engagement piece 19 that can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this embodiment, a connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and a connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left and right. It is formed in an asymmetric shape, and the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Have been.

  The connecting member 14 has an upper surface and a lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 has an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. A predetermined screw is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates through the side frame plates 12, 13 in a state where the vertical pieces 18 are in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12, 13, and a predetermined screw is formed. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12, 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates through the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts against the lower inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The four connecting members 14 allow the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 to be connected. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 is provided with an upper support member 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and a lower portion arranged to face the upper support member 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side of the left side frame plate 12. A supporting member 21; a reinforcing member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower supporting member 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13; and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing member 22. 23. The upper support 20 and the lower support 21 support the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20 a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20 b projecting forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20 a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, A support hook hole 20c formed by notching so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame hanging down from the left ends of the fixing piece 20a and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e (see FIG. 14A) that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protrusion 20b. 14), and a stop hanging part 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the support hook hole 20c. A support pin 633 (see FIG. 57) of an upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support 20. Further, the upper support member 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing pieces 20a and the hanging fixing pieces 20d.

  In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the support projecting piece 20b is increased by a hanging wall 20e hanging down from the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b. Can be concealed so that the lock member 27 disposed on the back surface of the player cannot be seen from the player side, so that the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a V-shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. The width of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped support protrusion 21c protruding forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-shaped protrusion protruding upward from near the front end of the support protrusion 21c. And a support projection 21d. A main frame support formed on a main frame support 644 (see FIG. 59 and the like) of the main frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21. After the support projection 21d of the support fitting 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main frame support 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 which are arranged inside the right side frame plate 13 and are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24, 25 are formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 82) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described later in detail, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing bracket 22. The guide plate 26 is provided for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and is turned by the rivet 28 with respect to the support projecting piece 20b. It is movably supported. The lock member 27 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a stopper 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. An operating portion 27b protruding, an elastic piece 27c protruding from a side opposite to a position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and a distal end of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L-shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. The elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width smaller than that of the stopper 27a or the operation unit 27b, and to extend forward as the distance from the stopper 27a to the left increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the distal end contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c has a hanging wall. The stopper 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so that the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the leading space of the support hook hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the distal end space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c and the distal side of the stopper 27a. Is facing the stop hanging portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stopping hanging portion 20f, and it is not in a contact state). In a certain normal pivotal support state, the center of each of the pivotal support pin 633 and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the bent support hook hole 20c is inclined. It is in a state of facing in a direction shifted. In this normal pivoting state, the pivoting pin 633 that pivotally supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip of the support hook hole 20c. Since the load is hardly applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a from the above, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. In addition, since the tip of the stopper 27a is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d, when the operating part 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly. Has become. Further, in the figure, the center of the arc of the tip end surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when an acting force F is applied in a direction in which the pivot pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, the acting force F is increased. A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the distal end surface 27d) acting on a contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, and one side of the inclined pin portion of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). There is no moment for rotating the tip in the direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip departs from the support projecting piece 20b, and the pivot pin 633 moves between the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. State sandwiched between the inner surface of one side To hold. For this reason, even in the normal support state or the state in which the acting force of the support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded, and the elastic piece integrally formed of the synthetic resin is used. The plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep can be prevented, and the pivot pin 633 can be prevented from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied to rotate the distal end of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) to be disengaged from the support projecting piece 20b, one side of the distal end of the stopper 27a may be rotated. The lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because the lock member 27 does not rotate in the direction in which it comes into contact with the stop hanging portion 20f and further comes off.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the distal end portion of the stopper member 27a faces the outside of the support projecting piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) of the lock member 27 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Even if the member 27 rotates, the present applicant has pointed out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support bracket is provided in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support 644 (see FIG. 57) of the body frame 3. 21 need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and is pushed in. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. When the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 633 does not come into contact with the tip side surface of the stopper 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is rotated clockwise by being urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the entrance portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a faces the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the body frame 3 is lifted, and the engagement between the body frame shaft support hole formed in the body frame shaft support 644 and the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support metal 21 is released, so that the body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame 2. It can be removed from.

  As described above, the outer frame 2 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the related art, and the side frame plates 12, 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be easily hit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily installed on the existing pachinko island equipment. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light-weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, the thickness can be reduced while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 57 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be increased, and the gaming board 4 having a large left-right dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3 and, at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. The outer frame 2 is fastened tightly to the inner surface, and is fastened in a state where the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other. It can be used as a rectangular framework. After the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member that protrudes outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device ( For example, it can be mounted in close contact with an adjacent ball rental machine or CR unit.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear right. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As shown, the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape formed into a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The frame base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the left outer periphery, an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower end lower side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. There.

  Further, the door frame 5 includes a plate unit 300 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the gaming window 101, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a door penetrating the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball; and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. , A ball feeding unit 580 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and mounted to close the gaming window 101 behind the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

[3-1. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from behind.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and having an inner periphery formed in a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape. 110, an upper bracket 120 attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 at the front of the door frame base main body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and at the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 at the front of the door frame base main body 110 It includes a pair of side speakers 130 to be attached, and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured such that a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and a lower portion of the gaming window 101 are covered with a rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side (open side) ), Which is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 which is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the fire cover 191. Relay terminal plate 192 that relays the connection between the handle relay terminal plate 192 and a hand that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192. The relay frame 193 and the door frame base are disposed on the opposite side of the firing cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 (right side of the center in the left-right direction (axial support side) in rear view) with the center in the left-right direction interposed therebetween. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 attached to the rear surface of the main body, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 that covers the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are provided.

  The rigidity of the door frame base unit 100 is increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 formed by assembling metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and also has a peripheral control provided on the game board 4 described later. An amplifying circuit connected to the board 4140 and amplifying the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputting it to each speaker 130 is provided. Although not specifically illustrated, in the present embodiment, each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, and each of the decorative substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 are provided. The wiring connecting the dial drive motor 414, the switches 432a, 432b, 432c, the color LED 432d, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball lending unit 360 of the plate unit 300, etc., the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is gathered and bundled at the right side (axial support side) in the rear view, and then extends rearward to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3. It is to be connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape by a synthetic resin, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a vertically long, substantially elliptical inner shape. Is formed in such a form that the entire game window 101 is offset upward. As shown in the figure, the left and right inner edges of the gaming window 101 are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, a square notch 101a at the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivot side (left side in front view). Is formed. In the door frame base body 110, the upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and the width of the left and right sides are the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side supporting sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. , And the gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a larger game area 1100 than the conventional pachinko game machine can be easily formed. I can do it.

  The door frame base main body 110 is, besides the gaming window 101, a speaker mounting portion 111 disposed on both left and right outer sides of a lower side of the gaming window 101 for mounting and fixing the side speakers 130, and a ball feeding unit 580. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 penetrating in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball transfer unit mounting concave portion 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball transmitting unit mounting concave portion 112 for the ball transmitting unit 580. A ball feeding opening 113 for supplying a handle, and a handle mounting for mounting a handle bracket 140 which is inclined obliquely so that a right (open side) end of a front surface which is disposed at a lower right corner in a front view and protrudes forward retreats. Part 114, a wire passage opening 115 through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114, and a handle attachment part Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a 14 cylinder extending short toward the front by the upper is provided with an insertion possible Joana 116.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle relay terminal plate 192 below the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in rear view. And a board mounting portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (supporting side) of the game window 101 for mounting the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a lower left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 as viewed from the rear side (open side) closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 protruding rearward from the arrangement and for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180, and the door frame base body 110 have a rearwardly recessed glass substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. A glass unit supporting step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the unit 590 can contact, and a glass unit locking member 190 which projects rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101; Further comprises a four engaging member mounting portion 110b for rotatably supporting the.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower side by a predetermined amount, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is provided with an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the entry of the tool can be prevented by the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603, and the security function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning projection 110d that projects rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and that fits into the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning projection 110d into the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 has a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the side speakers 130, the handle bracket 140, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  In addition, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting concave portion 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, a lower tray ball supply port 310g in the tray unit base 310 of the tray unit 300 described later and the At a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the center of the front upper portion of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in detail, the left and right brackets attached to the door frame base unit 100 are not shown. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is hidden, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. The upper bracket 120 has a part of its tip inserted into the upper decorative unit 280, and can support the upper decorative unit 280 from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It has become.

  Although a detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the center axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1 m) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. .5m), so that the sound reaches the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 most efficiently. The side speakers 130 mainly output sounds in the middle and high frequency range, and are disposed at positions as far away from the pachinko gaming machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, a sound with high stereo feeling can be output.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 of the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft from the rear end of the tubular portion 141 to the axis of the tubular portion 141. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The ridge 143 is provided with a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wire passage port 115 when attached to the handle attaching portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three grooves 502a of the handle device 500 match. I have. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely, so that the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 extends to the right (open side) as it goes forward in front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body. 110, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side edge of the door frame base body 110, and a support side reinforcing sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side side of the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and these are formed in a square shape by being mutually fastened with screws or rivets.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having upper and lower ends of a shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 and a shaft pin 155 provided on the upper surface so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. And a lower shaft support 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft supports 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protruding piece 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protruded piece 160 that is bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent protruding piece 161 which is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by a lower bent protrusion 159 and an upper bent protrusion 160. The vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at a lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent protruding piece 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the left and right direction and It can be restricted from moving backward. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101 a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open-side outer bent protruding pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. And an open-side inner bent protrusion 164. The open-side inner bent protrusion 164 is formed to extend rearward longer than the open-side outer bent protrusion 163 as shown in the figure. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 is provided at a lower rear portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped support-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at an outer end of a long side thereof and that opens to the outside of the support side. In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 includes bent protruding pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The supporting-side reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of an upper supporting portion 156 and a lower supporting portion 158. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased, thereby causing an illegal operation. Although the act may be easily performed, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased because the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 has the U-shaped protrusion 166. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. Further, a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 into the U-shape. Of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented, and only the pivot-support-side reinforcing metal plate 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the security function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This security cover 180 is provided with a security function for covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized devices from entering the game board 4. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It has a contact recess 181 formed, and a security post 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. In addition, on both left and right ends of the security cover 180, security rear end protruding pieces 183 projecting rearward along the end shape are provided, respectively. In addition, in the rear view, the security rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (the shaft support side) is formed to extend rearward longer than the security rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, the front security piece 184 protrudes along the shape below the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and the left and right sides outside the front security piece 184. And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward at a lower end of the mounting member.

  In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (supporting side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching to the security cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the unit can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although not shown in detail, the security pre-projection piece 184 fits with the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and The rear surface at the lower end of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, half of the pivot support side is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and half of the open side is projected forward when the door frame 5 is closed. It is configured to be inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component 1110. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the protruding piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent a ball hitting the glass plate 594 from hitting or feeding backward in the guide path portion.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with a fitting portion 190a that rotatably fits into a locking member mounting portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. A locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. This glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for retaining to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is configured to be rotatably supported on the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached and detached. The finger is used when operating. Note that, of the four glass unit locking members 190, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in rear view has no ridge, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing. Further, the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in rear view includes an operation piece 190c extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a in a direction different from the locking piece 190b. I have. As shown in FIG. 18, the rear side of the operation piece 190c is covered with the security cover 180, so that the operation piece 190c cannot be operated when the security cover 180 is attached. The rotation of the glass unit locking member 190 can easily prevent the glass unit 590 from being detached.

  The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 are fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, respectively. In a state where the firing cover 191, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hit ball firing device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[3-2. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decorative unit 200 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27A is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 27B is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front by exploding. Further, FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit when disassembled and seen from the rear.

  As shown, the right side decorative unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right outer half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower portion in a front view, and the inside is the gaming window 101. In addition to being formed in an arc shape along the outside, the outside is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms the framework of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The upper side decorative member 204 fits from behind and covers the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the upper side decorative member 204, and the upper side decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the upper side decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208, a side lens 210 that supports a lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side decorative frame 202 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted on the back side of the side lens 210 And

  The right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center in the up-down direction to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the right side. A right side lower decorative substrate 216 having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full-color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface of the substrate 214 and disposed on the lower side of the lower side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center in the vertical direction; A right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 and sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and a right side covering the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216. Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 216 The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decorative unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left in the front view of the side decorative frame 202, and an upper part that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the rear upper part of the side decorative frame 202. A speaker bracket 224; an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decorative frame 202; and a side sub-lens 228 attached to a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208 from inside. I have. Behind the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper right decorative board 214 is arranged, and the LED 214c is illuminated and decorated.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of an opaque member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the upper side decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are formed of a translucent member. The upper side cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the upper side decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It has been.

  Although not shown in detail, the back side of the substantially transparent side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 and the front side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 disposed behind the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 are played. It cannot be clearly seen from the user side. The front surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like allows the right side decorative unit 200 to efficiently emit light. The decorative substrates 214 and 216 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative board 214 and the lower right side decorative board 216 are respectively connected to the peripheral control board 4140, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4140. , 216b to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can emit light.

  As shown, the side decoration frame 202 of the right side decoration unit 200 is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game window 101. An inner frame 202a, which is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 202a to the outside and is linear from the lower end to the upper portion along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the upper portion that continues is the inner frame An outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward an upper edge of the outer frame 202a, an upper frame 202c connecting upper edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, and a lower edge of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a. The lower frame 202d connecting the edges and the inner frame 202a are arranged at a plurality of locations (four in the present embodiment) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting the outer frame 202b 02a.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decorative frame 202 extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends thereof protrude forward. The curved arc-shaped portion of the outer frame 202b, which is above the linearly vertically extended portion, is also formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper edge protrudes forward. The partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction such that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b projects most forward. The partition frame 202f is arranged on the radiation radially extending from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 202 has a configuration in which the space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition frames 202f. Is formed as a light emission decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210 described later is fitted from the rear side. The radiation lens 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the slit 202e and the light-emitting decoration opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition frame 202f, so that the respective light-emitting modes can be made different.

  As shown, the upper side decorative member 204 of the right side decorative unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a fixed height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decorative frame 202, and at the rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The upper side decorative member 204 is provided with a jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in rows.

  On the other hand, the upper side decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the concave rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 through the opening 204a to near the front end thereof. It has a plurality of light guides 206a that can protrude. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 204a of the upper side decorative member 204, so that it looks as if a jewel is fitted into the opening 204a. I can do it. Also, the light from the right upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side can be radiated forward (the player side) from the opening 204a of the upper side decorative member 204 by the light guide portion 206a of the upper side decorative lens 206. At the same time, the tip of the light guide 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

  The upper surface and the right side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 are shaped substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 has an attachment step 208a that is open at the bottom and is depressed rearward at the lower part of the front surface so that the side upper decoration member 204 can be accommodated. At the end surface, a mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed. On the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, two notches 208b arranged vertically are formed, and the side sub-lens 228 mounted inside through the notch 208b is directed to the front side. Has become. By fitting the side sub-lens 228 into the cutout portion 208b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light only in this portion in a different manner.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a concave rear surface, and is later inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202. A peripheral lens part 210a and a radiation lens part 210b that is inserted later into the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202 are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. The storage step part 210c is formed. An upper right speaker 222 and an upper speaker bracket 224, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step 210c. The side lens 210 includes a mounting portion 210d that forms the upper surface of the housing step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 208a in the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Although not shown in detail, the back surface (inner surface) of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is not uniform. Accordingly, light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 210a to have a glittering characteristic appearance.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a part of the side lens 210 where the peripheral lens part 210a and the radiation lens part 210b are formed, as illustrated. The main body 212a has a concave rear surface, and corresponds to the radiation lens 210b (slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202), which is continuous from the rear end of the main body 212a and protrudes forward from the main body 212a. And a plate-shaped light guide portion 212b disposed at a predetermined position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance away from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The light transmitted through the main body 212a is irregularly refracted by the uneven thickness of the main body 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be double turbulently refracted, and the shape and the like of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It can hardly be recognized. In addition, due to diffused reflection in the form of a polyhedron together with diffused refraction, the appearance of the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) can be made glittering, and the perspective can be made to look strange and unclear.

  The right upper decorative board 214 and the right lower decorative board 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-luminance color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative opening 202g of the side decorative frame 202 (the periphery of the side lens 210). As the LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens unit 210a), those having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the slits 202e of the side decorative frame 202 (for the side lens 210) are used. The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have relatively narrow irradiation angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). In the present embodiment, the LED 214c of the upper right decorative board 214 for emitting and decorating the side sub-lens 228 is a red LED.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs middle and high range sounds similarly to the side speaker 130, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. I have. The upper speaker bracket 224 supporting the upper right speaker 222 is provided with a cylindrical horn portion 224a projecting obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, so that the upper right speaker 222 is not seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in a front view. Has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a player below by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and generates noise for other pachinko gaming machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front faces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens section 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body section 212a of the side inner lens 212. The light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform thickness of the plate.

  The upper speaker cover 226 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved shape so as to be continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226, so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, light is irregularly refracted in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226. The outer appearance of the side lens 210 has the same appearance as that of the peripheral lens portion 210a.

[3-3. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 30A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 30B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed from the front by exploding. Further, FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed from the rear.

  As shown, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating a left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding a lower portion in a front view, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 is provided with a side decoration frame 242 that forms the skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The upper side decorative member 244 fits from the rear side, covers the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative member 244, and the upper side decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports a lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame decoration 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted on the back side of the side lens 250. And

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) mounted on the surface on the left side. A substrate 254, a lower side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the lower side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256 a (full color LED) and 256 b (white LED) mounted on the surface; A left upper decorative board cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper decorative board 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decorative frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256 That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 arranged on the upper right portion in a front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 242. A speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decorative frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, the side decoration frame 242, the upper side decoration member 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the upper side decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The upper side cover 248 is almost milky, and the upper side decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although not shown in detail, the back side of the substantially transparent side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 and the front side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 are played. It cannot be clearly seen from the user side. The front surfaces of the upper left decorative board 254 and the lower left decorative board 256 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like allows the left decorative unit 240 to efficiently emit light. The decoration substrates 254 and 256 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left decorative board 254 and the lower left decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control board 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4140. Is emitted as appropriate, so that the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  As shown, the side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game window 101. An inner frame 242a, and a straight line extending from the lower end to the upper portion along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) at a position away from the inner frame 242a to the outside, and the upper portion continuing therefrom is the inner frame. An outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward an upper edge of the outer frame 242a, an upper frame 242c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, and a lower edge of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a. A lower end frame 242d for connecting the edges and a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) inner frames arranged along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 42a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, while the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends thereof protrude forward. In addition, the curved arc-shaped portion of the outer frame 242b that is higher than the linearly extending portion in the vertical direction is formed in an arc shape that is also curved in the front-rear direction such that the upper end edge side projects forward. The partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction such that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b projects most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation radially extending from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 has a configuration in which the space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition frames 242f. Is formed as a light emitting decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 described later is fitted from the rear side. The radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light-emitting decoration opening 242g can be separated by the partition frame 242f, so that each light-emitting mode can be made different.

  As shown, the upper side decorative member 244 of the left side decorative unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decorative frame 242, and at the rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The upper side decorative member 244 has a jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in rows.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the concave rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to near the front end thereof. It has a plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 244a of the upper side decorative member 244, so that it looks as if a jewel is fitted into the opening 244a. I can do it. Further, the light from the upper left side decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side can be radiated to the front (the player side) from the opening 244a of the upper side decorative member 244 by the light guide portion 246a of the upper side decorative lens 244. At the same time, the tip of the light guide 246a can be made to shine as a jewel.

  The upper side surface 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has an upper surface and a left side surface (when viewed from the front) having a shape substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 has a mounting step 248a which is open at the bottom and is depressed rearward at the lower part of the front surface so as to be able to accommodate the side upper decorative member 244. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b on the outer side surface (left side surface in front view) of the upper frame supporting portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side.

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a concave rear surface, and is later inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242. A peripheral lens part 250a and a radiation lens part 250b that is inserted later into the slit 242e of the side decoration frame 242 are provided. As shown, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light-emitting decoration opening 242g that is in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. The storage step portion 250c is provided. An upper left speaker 262 and an upper speaker bracket 264, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step 250c. The side lens 250 includes a mounting portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the housing step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242. Although not shown in detail, the back surface (inner surface) of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to exhibit a glittering characteristic appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are formed, as illustrated. The main body 252a has a concave rear surface, and corresponds to the radiation lens 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) while continuing from the rear end of the main body 252a and protruding forward from the main body 252a. And a plate-like light guide portion 252b arranged at a predetermined position. The main body 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance away from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform plate thickness of the main body 252a.

  By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be double turbulently refracted, and the shape and the like of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It can hardly be recognized. In addition, due to diffuse reflection in the form of a polyhedron together with diffuse refraction, the appearance of the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) can be made glittering, and the perspective can be made to look unclear.

  The left upper decorative board 254 and the left lower decorative board 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative opening 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens unit 250a) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slits 242e of the side decorative frame 242 (for the side lenses 250). The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens section 250b) have relatively narrow irradiation angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. I have. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker backside of the horn portion 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the horn portion 264a prevents the upper left speaker 262 from being seen from the player side in a front view. Has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the lower player by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and generates noise for other pachinko gaming machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front faces that face different directions, like the peripheral lens section 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body section 252a of the side inner lens 252. The light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness of the surface.

  The upper speaker cover 266 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g that is in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266, so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, light is irregularly refracted in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the left upper speaker 262 and the through hole 266a formed in the upper speaker cover 266. The appearance can be made similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[3-4. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the rear after being disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between and decorates between them. As shown in the drawing, the upper decoration unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangle shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and has a central opening 281a penetrating largely at the center, and penetrating both left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decoration member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b, into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the center opening 281a, and a rear side inside the center opening 281a of the front decoration member 281. A central lens 282 fitted from the inside, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted into the side opening 281 b of the front decorative member 281 from the rear, The front lens 281 has a shape similar to that of the front decoration member 281, and the center lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 281 so as to be sandwiched by the decoration member 281; an upper decoration board 286 disposed behind the main body member 285 and having a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the front surface; And a board cover 287 whose outer shape in a front view is substantially the same as that of the main body, and which is attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so as to cover the upper decorative substrate 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decoration unit 280 extends rearward while bending so as to be continuous from the lower end of the front decoration member 281, and has a front end upper portion supported by the front decoration member 281 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 and a lower portion. A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from above and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287. , Is provided. In this embodiment, a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the center lens 282, and the LED 286b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be separately illuminated. In the present embodiment, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-luminance white LED.

  In the front decoration member 281 of the upper decoration unit 280, the inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a is such that, when viewed from the front, the center upper end is a side extending left and right, the center lower end is a vertex, and each side extends in a gentle arc shape. It is formed in a pentagonal shape, and has three protruding portions extending into the central opening 281a from the approximate center and lower end vertex of the upper side on both sides of the upper side. The front decoration member 281 is formed with a plurality of sculptures extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the center opening 281a, and the sculpture causes the front decoration member 281 to move from the center opening 281a. The blade is formed in a shape as if it were extended, and a side opening 281b is formed along the line.

  The outer shape of the central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has substantially the same shape as the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward and has a front surface. Are formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The center lens 282 is formed of a transparent (colorless and transparent, colored and transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a gem with a rillant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel pedestal. .

  The inner lens 283 disposed on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and has a fine lens (or prism) on the surface. A plurality of light beams from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin such that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 in a state of being fitted into the side opening 281b. Have been. A plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284 in the same manner as the inner lens 283, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by light irradiated from the upper decorative substrate 286. It can emit light.

  The inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of cloudiness due to a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. Has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decoration unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281 a of the front decoration member 281, and extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction. Is inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a has substantially the same position as a rear end of the central portion 285a, and a front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative board 286 through the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. ing. In the main body member 285, when the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c, so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b of the main body member 285 have a concave shape from the front side to the rear side, so that the light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to be thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The upper speaker covers 226 and 266 have an end nearer to the upper frames 202c and 242c and are fixedly mounted. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower decorative member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Light from the upper right side decorative board 214 and the upper left side decorative board 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224, 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[3-5. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the plate unit 300. It is arranged between. The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover 291 having a plurality of disc-shaped holes curved to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and supports the outer periphery of the cover 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 having an annular opening that is formed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240; and a lower plate of the plate unit 300 disposed below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328.

  In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a milky white translucent member similar to the lower plate cover 328 of the plate unit 300 described later. The side speaker cover 290 is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-6. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

  The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 described later, and a game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hit ball firing device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends substantially in the left-right direction. The upper and rear sides are open and the upper and rear sides are opened, and the left side (the pivot side) of the front view is largely bulged forward, and the upper end of the upper body 312 is covered. An upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the direction protrudes forward, and a upper plate front portion having a plurality of openings 316a that are attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrate vertically. A left and right side having a decorative member 316 and a plurality of light guide portions 318a disposed between the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and fitted into the openings 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316; The upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper lens 318 are disposed on the opposite side of the upper plate upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a are mounted on the upper surface. From the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 disposed between the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314. And an upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing light toward the upper upper lens 318 side.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 below the upper plate main body 312 and is open at the top and rear, and the center in the left-right direction swells forward in front view and the front end moves to the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish main body 324 formed so as to become lower as it goes forward, and is fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish main body 324, and the center in the left-right direction in front view bulges forward substantially in the same manner as the lower dish main body 324, and the front end extends in the left-right direction. A lower plate having a plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a lower plate having an opening 328a along the front end of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324 and covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a. A cover 328, a plate-side middle cover 330 having openings 330 a that are disposed on the left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and an opening 330 a of the plate-side middle cover 330 And a dish side outer cover 334 disposed on both left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 and extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. Note that the plate side middle cover 330 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front has a lock hole 330b formed at the right end thereof, through which a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later faces. In addition, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the right dish side outer cover 334 when viewed from the front.

  Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling out the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and mounted on the upper left side in front view of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a ball rental unit 360 for operating a CR unit (not shown).

  The plate unit 300 constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the upper plate main body 312, the upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate main body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on an upper edge extending in the left-right direction. Provided. A ball lending unit mounting portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and mounting the ball lending unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The plate unit base 310 is disposed below the ball lending unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in front view), and is a horizontally elongated rectangular plate hole supply port 310c penetrating in the front-rear direction. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d which penetrates in the front-rear direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a below the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) and extends vertically, and an upper plate A pair of lower plate support portions 310e, which are disposed immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface, are provided. The upper bowl discharge port 310d is formed continuously up to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower bowl support 310e disposed immediately below.

  In addition, the plate unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower plate support portions 310e, is fitted with the lower ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and has a horizontally long rectangular lower plate support formed in a front view. It has a groove 310f, and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is arranged at a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h that extends rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough.

  The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is connected to the door frame base unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the cutout portions 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. The first sphere outlet 544a of the unit 540 is communicated with. At the front end of the upper dish ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends long in the right direction as viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 is increased toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. Is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the fal cover unit 540. Since it is impossible to linearly enter the upper plate 301 in front of the upper plate supply port 310c, the dispensed game balls come into contact with the game balls having the front side of the upper plate supply port 310c closed and rotate. The moving direction is changed, and the guide recess 310j is guided to roll rightward in a front view, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. It becomes. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not bring the game balls by hand when the game balls close the front of the upper plate supply port 310c. Even so, it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling troublesome in storing the game balls in the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting the player to the operation of hitting the game ball or playing the game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Is available.

  The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 is connected to the opening 344a of the upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 and the ball sending opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 through the door. Furthermore, 310 g of lower dish ball supply ports extend rearward from a lower dish ball supply gutter 310 h that extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110 f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper counter ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper bowl drain base 344.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower countersunk ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened section 310k that spreads leftward when viewed from the front. The front end of the mouth 310g is widened in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early occurrence of ball clogging in the lower dish ball supply port 310g due to game balls in the lower dish 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower dish ball supply port 310g. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is entirely lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. I have. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 has a rear end on the pivot side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310 and a rear end on the open side in the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls that are formed so as to be located near the middle position in the vertical direction and that are supplied to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate main body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can contact a game ball from the rear end of the bottom surface to the open side from the center in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is located outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper ball removing button 341 to be described later penetrates vertically. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed at the front end in a step shape lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 by one step, and has a decoration mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. An operation unit mounting portion 314c formed in a stepped shape lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position on the front side of the dish main body 312 and for mounting an operation unit 400 described later.

  Although not described in detail, the decorative mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 mounted on the lower surface. An opening and a cutout penetrating in the direction are formed, and an opening or the like through which a wiring cable connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control board 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

  The upper plate front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the light guide portion of the upper plate upper lens 318 is provided from a lower side to the plurality of openings 316 a. The upper plate 318a is fitted into the decoration mounting portion 314b of the upper plate 314, so that the upper plate upper lens 318 can be sandwiched between the upper plate 314 and the upper plate 314. An upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is disposed below the upper plate upper lens 318, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are provided. Is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper plate upper lens 318 can be substantially uniformly illuminated. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. The light guide portion 318a is fitted into the opening portion 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 so as to have an appearance as if a pair-shaped cut jewel is fitted. .

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that spreads in a fan shape forward in a plan view, and a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction, and a substantially center of the upper surface is formed to be lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is lower at the front side and higher toward the rear side, and at the side of the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the end is formed linearly, and the left and right ends of the lower plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear upper end portion.

  In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. The lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 has an outer shape in front view that bulges downward, and each side is formed in an inverted triangular shape with a circular arc, and has an opening 328a that penetrates in the center in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the opening 328a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the lower plate main body 324 and the front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals on the back side, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The plate side middle cover 330 is disposed on both left and right outer sides of the lower plate cover 328 in a front view, and is provided along a lower side of the lower plate cover 328 from substantially the center in the left-right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. An upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 has an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right side (open side) of the dish side middle cover 330 in a front view has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near the outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from a lower front end thereof, and a rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to a front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It has become. Further, a lower part of the lower plate main body 324 is covered with the bottom plate portion 330c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on both left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 in a front view. It is formed in a box shape. In this embodiment, a handle insertion hole 334a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334. This dish side outer cover 334 is adapted to be attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a part is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 except the central portion is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper bowl removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl removing button 341 attached to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper upper panel 314 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction. The operation piece 342 which is moved up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310, and slides up and down by the up and down movement of the actuation piece 342, and a ball feeding unit 580 described later The upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 with a contact piece 343a contacting the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, and the upper plate ball removing slider 343 can be slid vertically. And an upper tray removing base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the operation piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper countersunk button 341 such that the upper countersunk button 341 is located at the upper moving end is omitted. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper countersunk ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper countersunk ball removing slider 343 and the upper countersunk ball removing base 344.

  The upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl discharge port 310d of the bowl unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper bowl discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (FIG. 39), and a ball guiding flow path 344b (FIGS. 38 and FIG. 38) that guides the game ball that has communicated with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides the game ball backward. 40), extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, and then extending substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl removing base 344 toward the right side (supporting side) end in rear view. And a ball removal channel 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  The opening 344a communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b that communicates with the opening 344a has the lower end of the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is connected to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the ball feeding unit 580 It can be supplied to.

  The upper end of the ball removing channel 344c of the upper bowl removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivot side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h in the tray unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 can be used. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. In addition, the lower part of the rear end of the ball emptying channel 344c is closed by an upper dish emptying channel cover 345.

  When the upper counter-ball-pulling button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper counter-ball-pulling mechanism 340 slides the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 343 downward, and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. Then, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate extraction base 344 and the ball guiding flow path 344b. After entering, the ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper ball drain base 344, and from the lower ball feed port 310g through the lower ball feed gutter 310h of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate 302. Can be discharged to

  The ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by a coil spring. Even if a game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partitioning portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the game balls from being damaged and to prevent the game balls from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower plate removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 includes a lower plate removing base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330c of the plate side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 on the left and right in front view. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removing base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b of the lower dish main body 324; The slider 353 includes a lower-drill ball-pulling slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball-drilling base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower-drill ball-pulling button 354 attached to the front end of the lower-drill ball-pulling slider 353.

  The lower bowl removing base 351 includes a base bowl removing hole 351a vertically penetrating at a position facing the lower bowl removing hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324. The opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower countersunk ball hole 324b, and a shutter ball punching hole disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in a vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower countersunk ball hole 324b. 352b, and is urged by a coil spring so that the closing portion 352a is located at a position for closing the lower ball drain hole 324b and the base ball drain hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can be brought into contact with the lower plate ball removing slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated so as to move rearward by the lower ball removing slider 353, or the lower plate removing slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring. Is available.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower plate ball removing button 354 is disposed at a position sandwiched between the left and right plate side middle covers 330 on the lower side of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 in the left-right direction. The surface shape is smoothly continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  Also, in the lower dish removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish removing hole 324b of the lower dish main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower dish removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower ball removing slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided for holding the slider 353 at the predetermined position.

  In a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the like, the lower plate ball removing button 354 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end. In this state, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, game balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball pullout button 354 is pressed rearward, the lower plate ball pullout button 354 and the lower plate ball pullout slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower plate ball pullout slider 353 slides back and forth to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter hole 352b move rearward against the urging force of the coil spring.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps the lower ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and then the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower ball hole 352b. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 via the lower plate ball hole 324b. It should be noted that when the lower ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the slide is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower ball removing button 354 is kept in the open state in which the lower ball removing button 354 is retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is set in the lower ball removing hole 352b. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate 302 is kept pressed and the lower ball punch button 354 is not pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower bowl removing hole 324b, when the lower bowl removing button 354 that is retracted is further pushed backward, the holding of the lower bowl removing slider 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower bowl removing hole 324b is released. The ball-sliding slider 353 can be slid, and the opening / closing shutter 352 in which the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in a direction to close the lower-stem ball-sampling hole 324b, the closing portion 352a is moved downward by the urging force. It turns in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower ball draining slider 353 slides forward, and the lower ball pulling hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower ball pulling button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, so that game balls can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower bowl removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

  The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency indicator 365c can be visually recognized through the remaining rental display unit 363. The ball rental switch 365a, the return switch 365b, and the remaining frequency indicator 365c are mounted on a frequency indicator 365, and the frequency indicator 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. The ball lending unit 360, when cash or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in a plate unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) to the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the remaining cash or the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the borrowed amount is returned. ing. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decoration portion 310a at the upper end of the plate unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

[3-7. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit when the pressing operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and includes a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player. And an operation unit 405. The operation unit 405 can receive a player's operation according to a game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , So that the user can also participate in the effects during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to a lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416 a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, It has a spring 418 that urges upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation section holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder 401a of the dial operation unit 401 to pass therethrough. And a lower cover 424 that is attached to the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covers the lower surfaces of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the driven gear 410 is twice the number of teeth of the drive gear 412, that is, the reduction ratio is set to a value of 2. Therefore, the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotating shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is used. After two rotations, the driven gear 410 meshing with the drive gear 412 makes one rotation. The dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor whose output shaft rotates 15 ° in one step and 360 ° in 24 steps. Therefore, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates 15 ° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates 15 °, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio becomes 2 Accordingly, the dial operating unit 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30 ° together with the driven gear 410.

  Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and has an opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support board 430 having an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b and the inner cylinder section 401a of the dial operation section 401 can pass, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted on the upper surface at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation section 401. And fixed below the base member 420, A button decoration board 432 having a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a pressing detection switch 432c for detecting operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405; , Is provided. The rotation detecting switches 432a and 432b and the pressing detecting switch 432c have a U-shape, and the rotation detecting switches 432a and 432b are mounted on the button decoration board 432 so that the open sides thereof face upward. On the other hand, the press detection switch 432c is mounted on the button decoration board 432 in a state where its open side is turned down by 90 ° from the upward direction.

  The dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a translucent material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder 401a extending vertically and a surface extending outward from an upper end of the inner cylinder 401a. An annular top plate 401b provided with a predetermined decoration (specifically, a design having smooth irregularities is given), and a cylindrical shape extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate 401b. It mainly includes an outer tube portion 401c shorter than the delivery inner tube portion 401a, and a flange portion 401d extending annularly outward from the lower end of the outer tube portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d in the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a in the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operating portion 401 includes a connection locking portion (see FIG. 44) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, so that the dial operating portion 401 is locked. 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected. Further, the dial operating unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder 401a. As will be described later in detail, the projecting portion 401f can be brought into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects from the dial operating portion 401. By contacting the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from further immersing into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

  As shown in the figure, the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operating portion 405 have their contact surfaces lower as going toward the center of the dial operating portion 401. The contact surfaces are large when they come into contact with each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a closed upper end, and has a button body 406 having a bottomed cylindrical shape, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 which is arranged inside the 407 and is held between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the bottom lower surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone lower surface. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating vertically is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b extending downward from the outer periphery lower part and having a lower end protruding outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with a locking protrusion 416g (see FIGS. 45 and 46) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not fall out of the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) does not rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. In addition, a predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and that can be detected by a pressing detection switch 432c mounted on the button decoration board 432. When the button body 406 (the pressing operation section 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c blocks the open-side optical axis of the U-shaped pressing detection switch 432c. Is to be detected.

  As described above, the press detection switch 432c is mounted on the button decoration board 432 in a state where its open side is turned to the front side, and when the button main body 406 (the press operation section 405) is operated and moves downward. In addition, a through hole 432h is formed in the button decoration substrate 432 so that the pressing detection piece 406c can penetrate the button decoration substrate 432. When the pressure detection piece 406c passes through the through hole 432h, it hits the surface of the piezoelectric element 425 attached to the lower cover 424 and pushes the piezoelectric element 425. When the pressure detecting piece 406c collides with the piezoelectric element 425 and is pushed in, the piezoelectric element 425 bends. When the button body 406 (pressing operation section 405) is not operated, the button body 406 (pressing operation section) is pressed by the urging force of the spring 418. 405) is pushed upward, so that the pressure detecting piece 406c is also pushed upward, the deflection of the piezoelectric element 425 is eliminated and the piezoelectric element 425 returns to its original state, and the penetration of the through hole 432h by the pressure detecting piece 406c is released. At the same time, the interruption of the pressure detection switch 432c to the optical axis on the open side by the pressure detection piece 406c is also released. Vibration is applied to the piezoelectric element 425 to bend and eliminate the bending, so that mechanical distortion occurs and an electromotive force is generated. The piezoelectric element 425 obtains an electromotive force from the mechanical strain generated by the vibration. Since the power is an alternating current, the piezoelectric element 425 is full-wave rectified by a full-wave rectifier circuit described later and then charged by an electrolytic capacitor described later. It has become.

  The electric power charged by the electrolytic capacitor is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed is powered out due to an electrical trouble or when a power failure occurs due to an emergency when a disaster occurs. When cut off, a discharge is caused, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted on the dial decoration substrate 430 and a plurality of color LEDs 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 can emit light. The light from the LED 430b is applied to the space formed by the inner cylinder portion 401a and the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401, so that the entire dial operation portion 401 emits light. 407 and the cap inner 408 are irradiated to the pressing operation unit 40. Whole is adapted to the mode of emission.

  As a result, even if the pachinko hall is completely dark due to the occurrence of a power failure (a power failure due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed or an emergency power failure in the event of a disaster), The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 emit light by the electric power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed adjacent to the pachinko island equipment. , And the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes an emergency light, which can be used as a mark for the player to evacuate out of the concourse or the pachinko hall. In other words, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can function as landmarks for evacuating a player to a concourse or a pachinko hall by emitting an emergency light during a power outage. I have.

  In addition, when the player merely enjoys operating the pressing operation unit 405 while playing a game, the power failure (the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed may cause a power failure due to an electrical trouble or an emergency in which a disaster occurs). When the pachinko hall becomes completely dark due to the occurrence of a power outage, electric power for causing the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to emit light as an emergency light in the event of a power outage can be generated and charged to the electrolytic capacitor WAC0. Therefore, although the player himself does not notice, it contributes to evacuating other players to the outside of the concourse or pachinko hall.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller outer diameter than the upper center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a between the upper and lower sides. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a lower portion than the step portion 407a and a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side of the step portion 407a has a dial operation portion. The diameter of the inner tube 401 is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner tube 401a and larger than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation section 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder section 401a from above the dial operation section 401, the step section 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation section 401. The button cap 407 (pressing section 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder section 401a (see FIG. 46).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation section 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on the annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular sliding surface on the lower surface which is in contact with the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410b extending upward from a position facing the upper end and protruding inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking unit 401e of the inner cylinder unit 401a.

  In addition, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detecting pieces 410c are detected by blocking the open optical axes of a pair of U-shaped rotation detecting switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432, and will be described in detail later. However, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d formed between the rotation detection pieces 410c allow the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operating section 401, to be driven by the detection patterns of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. The rotation direction can be detected. In the present embodiment, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  The drive gear 412 of the operation unit 400 is a spur gear meshing with the driven gear 410 as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to be able to rotate integrally with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control a rotation direction, a rotation speed, and a rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 drives the drive gear 412 to rotate via a rotation shaft by the dial drive motor 414. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, by rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) forward and reverse alternately in small increments by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the rotation and the rotation can be alternately repeated in small increments, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a predetermined rotation angle for a short time based on the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b and the like, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 can be clicked. The feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416 a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, a cylindrical body protruding upward from the inside of the gear rail 416 a, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 therein. A button support tube 416b that supports the button slidably in the up and down direction, and a locking protrusion 416g formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support tube 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 45 and 46), and a through hole 416c that passes light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration board 432 through the center of the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b to send the light to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation unit 405). And a rotation detection switch attached to the button decoration board 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the buttons 32a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e vertically penetrating the bottom of the button support tube 416b, and a pressing detection switch 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 faces from above, and downward from below. A pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation unit holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks it. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions capable of abutting on the claw 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button body 406 from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420 and positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432 are appropriately positioned. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be capable of dynamic rotation. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be supported via the button body 406 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. . A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and the frusto-conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

  The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is hardly damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower concave portion 420b in which the outer periphery of the operation portion holding member 416 is fittable and is depressed upward and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b in the vertical direction. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side to the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which is recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410, It has. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower concave portion 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower concave portion 420b. A plurality of (four in this embodiment) legs 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f that open downward at the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located above a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of substrate mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative substrate 430 protruding therefrom. Further, although detailed description of the base member 420 is omitted, positioning bosses for positioning the respective members, mounting holes, and the like are formed at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

  The operating member holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower concave portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side of the base member 420 into the central opening 420a. Is screwed from above into the operation section holding member 416 through the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation section holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly higher than the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper concave portion 420c in a state where the operation portion holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper concave portion 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper concave portion 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. , And the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. Thus, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and a problem can be prevented from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a on the top plate with an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a direction (the left-right direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (the driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial driving motor 414 (the driving gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend long, and is provided with an engagement claw 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engagement claw 422b with the engagement portion 424b of the lower cover 424, The upper cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one of the short-axis directions (the front-rear direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1) (the front side in the pachinko gaming machine 1), and has a claw-shaped engagement with a lower end protruding outward. A piece 422c is provided. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

  The upper cover 422 is attached to the base member 420 with the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation unit 401, and the like attached thereto, and the dial operation unit 401 is disposed below the opening 422a from below. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so that the dial operation part 401 passes, the dial operating part 401 can be prevented from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape whose upper side is open, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially matching the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and a leg portion of the base member 420 at a predetermined position on the bottom upper surface. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 includes an engaging portion 424b that can engage with the engaging claw 422b of the upper cover 422 at an upper portion of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the lower cover 424.

  As shown, the cover main body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates the center in the vertical direction and through which the dial operation portion 401 (excluding the flange portion 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the serving plate unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

  The operation unit 400 is configured to be attached to the plate unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, in a state where the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300, The lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted so that it is slightly floating (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) from the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. When the cover body 426 is hit or hit, the cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact.

  In this operation unit 400, with the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is mounted on the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300 with a predetermined screw. The structure is such that the front cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. The pair of rotation detecting switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 has a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detecting piece 410c. It has been. Thus, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between the detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and each rotation is performed. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the detection switches 432a and 432b.

  Although details will be described later, the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. I have. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a step-by-step manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, The rotation can be assisted, prevented from rotating intentionally, and a click can be given to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward direction and the rotation for reverse rotation in small increments.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step unit 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401, as shown in FIG. Since the cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is applied to the step portion 407a and the projecting portion 401f. The pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to be broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projection portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, the dial driving motor 414 is gradually adjusted. By alternately repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation, the pressing operation unit 405 can be caused to vibrate together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player, You can enjoy the production.

  Next, a description will be given of a dial vibration control in which the dial operation motor 401 is vibrated by alternately repeating a rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and a rotation for reverse rotation alternately. As described above, the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, and its output shaft rotates 15 ° in one step and rotates 360 ° in 24 steps. Therefore, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates 15 ° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates 15 °, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio becomes 2 Accordingly, the dial operating unit 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30 ° together with the driven gear 410.

  The output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is rotated forward by one step and then reversely rotated by one step. By alternately repeating such one-step forward rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated. Can be alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise in small increments to create a state as if the dial operating unit 401 is vibrating. The surface of the top plate 401b of the dial operating unit 401 is provided with a design having smooth irregularities, so that the dial operating unit 401 can be alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise in small increments. When the player's finger or palm touches the top plate portion 401b of the dial operation portion 401, the finger or palm is moved by the smooth unevenness provided on the surface of the top plate portion 401b, and the vibration is applied. It can also make people feel.

  The dial vibration control for alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward by one step and the rotation for reverse rotation is specifically performed by a peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 (see FIG. 100). A peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 receives a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command which is classified into a special figure 1 tuning effect related). When a special figure 2 tuning effect start command or the like (see FIG. 118), which is classified as a special figure 2 tuning effect related, is received, the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is controlled based on the received command. In the partial steady-state processing (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 143), the dial excitation is performed according to the schedule data for alternately and repeatedly rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 by one step in the normal direction and in the reverse direction. Perform control. The schedule data of the dial vibration control defines the start time and the end time of the dial vibration control, and is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100). . The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the dial vibration control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing described later (see step S1104 in FIG. 145).

  Next, rotation direction change control that can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction will be described. As described above, the dial operating section 401 is connected to the driven gear 410, and a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c arranged in a row at a constant interval on the driven gear 410 are detected by a pair of rotation detecting switches 432a and 432b. The rotation direction is detected based on the detected pattern.

  The rotation direction change control changes the rotation direction when the finger or palm of the player touches the dial operation unit 401 and the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 stops while rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise. When the dial operation unit 401 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction, or when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the finger or palm of the player touches the dial operation unit 401 to cause the dial operation unit 401 to rotate. When the rotation of the dial is stopped, the rotation direction is changed and the dial operation unit 401 starts rotating clockwise. When the rotation of the dial operating unit 401 is stopped, the rotation of the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operating unit 401 is also stopped. Therefore, the dial driving motor 414 fixed to the driving gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410. Of the output shaft is also stopped, and the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, is out of step. As described above, in the present embodiment, the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, can be stepped out according to the player's will. Therefore, the player touches the dial operation unit 401 with his / her finger or palm. Thus, the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 can be forcibly stopped or the rotation direction can be changed.

  Specifically, the control is performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140. A peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 receives a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command which is classified into a special figure 1 tuning effect related). When a special figure 2 tuning effect start command or the like (see FIG. 118), which is classified as a special figure 2 tuning effect related, is received, the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is controlled based on the received command. In the partial steady state processing (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 143), rotation direction change control is performed in accordance with schedule data for performing rotation for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 in the normal direction and rotation for rotating in the reverse direction. The rotation direction change control schedule data defines the rotation start timing and the rotation end timing of the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in advance. A plurality is stored. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs a rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 148) that is executed as one process in the operation unit information acquisition process (see step S1108 in FIG. 145) in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the created rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST, whether the dial operating unit 401 is in a stopped state (in other words, whether the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) 145, it is determined whether it is rotating clockwise or counterclockwise, and in the motor and solenoid driving process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process (step S1104 in FIG. 145). ), And performs rotation direction change control according to schedule data.

  For example, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a is currently rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise, the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST. When it is understood that the dial operation unit 401 is in a state of being turned, the rotation direction change control is continuously performed according to schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise, while the dial operation unit 401 is stopped (in other words, When it is determined that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step or is rotating counterclockwise, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise. .

  When the dial control unit 401 is currently rotating counterclockwise, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the dial control unit 401 counterclockwise from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST. When it is determined that the dial operation unit 401 is rotating, the rotation direction change control is continuously performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise, while the dial operation unit 401 is stopped ( In other words, when it is determined that the dial drive motor 414 is out of synchronization or is rotating clockwise, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise. Do.

  As described above, the dial vibration control and the rotation direction change control described above both rotate the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward or reverse, but the latter rotation direction change control uses the dial operation unit 401. Is executed when an external factor such as a case where the rotation direction of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is actually rotating reversely to the intended direction or a case where the peripheral control MPU 4150a is stopped, whereas the former dial vibration control is performed. Is completely different in that the period during which the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates forward or reverse is set in advance and executed regardless of the occurrence of an external factor.

  In the rotation direction change control, when it is determined that the dial drive motor 414 is out of synchronization, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is suddenly changed to the reverse rotation direction, whereas the dial vibration control is performed. Then, since the dial operation unit 401 is completely different in that the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated, in the rotation direction change control, the effect of the sense completely different from the effect of the effect using the dial operation unit 401 created by the dial vibration control is the same. Can be created by using the dial operation unit 401 of FIG.

  Next, click generation control that can give a click feeling to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. As described above, since the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, it can generate a static torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 by maintaining the energized state (excited state) of a specific phase of the stepper motor. Can be. Here, in the present embodiment, the first stationary torque generating state in which the excitation state is generated for the specific one phase while maintaining the excitation state, and the stationary state in which the excitation state is maintained for the specific two phases. And a second static torque generating state for generating torque.

  In the first static torque generation state, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to exceed the static torque in this state, the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is performed by the driven gear 410 and the dial drive in which the drive gear 412 is fixed. When transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft loses synchronism and rotates one step at a time, that is, rotates 15 ° at a time. . Even in the second static torque generation state, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to exceed the static torque in this state, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the driven gear 410 and the dial drive in which the drive gear 412 is fixed. When transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft loses synchronism and rotates one step at a time, that is, rotates 15 ° at a time. .

  In the second static torque generation state, the excitation state is maintained for the specific two phases. Therefore, the first static torque generation state in which the excitation state is maintained for the specific one phase is two times. Double static torque can be obtained. In other words, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second static torque generation state is transmitted twice as large as the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state.

  The stepping motor is normally controlled so as to prevent the step-out so as not to be out of control. In the present embodiment, the stepping motor is controlled by actively performing the step-out control, whereby the dial operating unit is controlled. Although a click feeling can be obtained in the rotation operation of the dial 401 and the click feeling is generated in two stages, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state can be lightly felt. On the other hand, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second static torque generation state can be made heavy.

  The click generation control capable of giving a click feeling to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is specifically performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 receives a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command which is classified into a special figure 1 tuning effect related). When a special figure 2 tuning effect start command or the like (see FIG. 118), which is classified as a special figure 2 tuning effect related, is received, a peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is controlled based on the received command. In the partial steady processing (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 143), click generation control is performed according to schedule data for generating static torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The schedule data of the click generation control defines the time when static torque is generated on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 and the time when it stops, and the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100). Are stored in advance. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs click generation control according to schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 145).

  As described above, the click generation control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, whereas the rotation direction change control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is rotating. They are completely different. Further, in the click generation control, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, there is a click feeling. On the other hand, in the rotation direction change control, the rotation direction is prevented by preventing (blocking) the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. In the click generation control, there is a completely different point in suddenly changing in the reverse rotation direction. In the click generation control, an effect of a feeling completely different from the effect using the dial operation unit 401 created by the rotation direction change control is performed by the same dial operation It can be created using the unit 401.

  Here, the torque-free control in which no static torque is applied to the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 will be described. In this torque-free control, all phases of the dial drive motor 414 are in a non-energized state (non-excited state), and the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is torque-free. That is, even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction, a state in which a load or a click sensation that hinders the operation is not generated at all.

  The effect using the torque-free control will be briefly described. For example, the effect screen selected by operating the dial operation unit 401 and rotating the dial operation unit 401 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 95). At the same time, the click generation control described above gives the dial operation unit 401 a click feeling, and when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 to rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise, suddenly, Then, the click generation control is stopped and the state becomes torque-free, that is, the state shifts to the torque-free control, and it can be used for the effect of causing the player to select an unintended effect screen (shooting a foot). In other words, in the click generation control, a static torque is generated on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, whereas in the torque-free control, the generated static torque is forcibly released, thereby causing the player's finger or the like to move. Since the static torque applied to the palm from the dial operating unit 401, which is a load from the dial operating unit 401, can be suddenly removed, the forcible release of the static torque causes the rotation operation of the dial operating unit 401 to give a slipping feeling to the player's finger or palm. Will be given to

  As described above, the present embodiment is based on a completely new idea of using a stepping motor as a man-machine interface in addition to the conventional idea of driving a movable body using a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140 performs operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later (step S1108 in FIG. 145). Dial operation unit 401 is stopped based on the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST created in the rotation detection switch history creation processing (see FIG. 148) executed as one process. , Rotating in a clockwise direction, or rotating in a counterclockwise direction, the player can operate independently of the progress of the effect (for example, Effects other than linking and operating the dial operation unit 401 (effects prompting the operation, etc.) It has to be able to view. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise when it recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm, Alternatively, the dial is rotated counterclockwise so as to rotate against the rotating direction of the dial operation unit 401 by the player.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 when it determines that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm irrespective of the progress of the effect. The rotation behavior imparting control is performed in accordance with schedule data for rotating clockwise or counterclockwise. The schedule data of the rotation behavior imparting control defines a rotation direction, a rotation speed, and the like for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is stored in a peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100). A plurality is stored in advance. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the rotation behavior imparting control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 145).

  As described above, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the finger or the palm of the player irrespective of the progress of the effect. Since the behavior is imparted to the dial operation unit 401 by rotating the output shaft, the dial operation unit 401 suddenly starts to move. In other words, when the player performs a meaningless operation on the dial operating unit 401 that has nothing to do with the effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 responds to this and the behavior is given to the dial operating unit 401. , The player operates to call attention so that the player does not perform meaningless operation on the dial operation unit 401. Such behavior by the dial operating unit 401 can give the player an impression as if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an intention. Therefore, novel playability by the operation member can be created.

[3-8. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame when disassembled and seen from behind. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the dish side outer cover 334 of the dish unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle. A rotating handle front 506 fixed to the front of the rear body 504 and rotatable integrally with the rotating handle rear 504; a handle base 502 disposed on the front of the rotating handle front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502; In cooperation with the front of the rotary handle 506 and rotation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 having a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, which is attached and fixed to the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A potentiometer 512 having a rotatable detection shaft portion 512a fitted to 510a and non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502; and a front surface of the handle base 502 such that the potentiometer 512 is sandwiched by the handle base 502. , A switch support member 514 having a through hole 514a through which the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 can pass, a touch switch 516 mounted on the rear surface of the switch support member 514, and a touch switch 516. A fire stop switch 518 mounted at different positions on the rear A single button 520 that is rotatably supported by the hive support member 514 to operate the firing stop switch 518, and an original rotation of the rotary handle main body front 506 and the rotary handle main body rear 504 arranged to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510. And a handle return spring 522 that urges it to return to a position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). In addition, the potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506. Further, the front 506 of the rotary handle and the rear 504 of the rotary handle main body are rotated from the original rotation position to a maximum rotation position in a clockwise direction in a front view to a limit rotation position (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). Move.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 has a front end side formed in a hemispherical shape bulging round toward the front side and a cylindrical shape having a rear end opened at the rear end side. Three grooves 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. Are located. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 such that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and three mounting bosses 508a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 508. The mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506a in the front of the rotating handle main body 506. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506 abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, so that the rotation range of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is restricted.

  In the handle device 500, a locking projection 506b projecting rearward is formed in the front 506 of the rotating handle main body. Are locked, and the other end (rear end) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the switch support member 514. The handle return spring 522 allows the rotary handle body 504 to be locked. , 506 are urged to rotate in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  The handle device 500 is adapted to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via a handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face outward (open side) in a plan view when viewed from above, so that the handle can be mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is adapted to be attached and fixed to the door frame 5. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the rotation operation without any unnaturalness in the rotation operation.

  In the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor. When the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member 510. It will be. Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotational position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. The game balls are driven into the game area 1100 at a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the rotary handle bodies 504, 506, that is, the rotational position of the rotary handle bodies 504, 506.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504, 506 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive material, and the touch switch 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the rotary handle bodies 504, 506 and the like. It has become. When the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate while the touch switch 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is rotated. Can be entered. That is, even if the player attempts to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven, and the player cannot drive the game ball. It is possible to prevent a player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce a load (burden) on a game hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

  When the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotation of the firing solenoid 654. It has become. Thus, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, the operation before the single-shot button 520 is operated is released. A game ball can be fired at the driving strength.

  The handle device 500 electrically detects the rotation operation of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 by the potentiometer 512, and based on the detection of the rotational position from the potentiometer 512, causes the firing control unit 4120 to rotate the firing solenoid 654. Since the strength is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball launching device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko game machine are used when the door frame 5 is closed. There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so as to be linked to each other and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified and the joint can be simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of malfunctions in the unit, and the fun of hitting the game ball reduces the interest of the player And it is capable to suppress.

[3-9. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame in a disassembled state, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame in a disassembled state. FIG. 50 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

  The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hit ball firing device 650. In spite of this, game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the inside of the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of flow paths for game balls therein, and a front cover 544 for closing a front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end of the cover base 542 communicating with the first ball entrance. A first ball passage 542b that spreads rightward as viewed from the front, a second ball inlet 542c that is disposed outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball inlet 542a, Inside the cover base 542, which communicates with the ball passage 542d, there is provided a second ball inlet 542c which extends downward and is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are connected to the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown, the height of a portion of the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is disposed substantially at the upper center in the left-right direction and is open at an upper side with a foul ball inlet 542e, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e to guide game balls to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542 g contacts the spherical contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The opening / closing shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. And a second ball outlet 544b disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is configured to be connected to the upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is configured to be connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a from the first ball outlet 544a through the first ball passage 542b. The unit 300 can be supplied to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Further, the foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. 544b can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball firing device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls down in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at foul ball inlet 542e from second ball outlet 544b to lower plate 302 of plate unit 300 through foul ball passage 542f and second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of accommodation space 546 in second ball passage 542d, and is pivotally supported on cover base 542 by game balls stored in accommodation space 546 so as to be swingable. A swing member 548, a full tank switch 550 for detecting swing of the swing member 548, and a spring 552 for urging the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full switch 550 is in a non-detection state. ing. As shown in FIG. 50, the swinging member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end rotating leftward when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the housing space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is substantially vertical. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on a side surface opposite to the storage space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full switch 550. . That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the accommodation space 546 is full of the stored game balls.

  Further, foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of accommodation space 546 in second ball passage 542d, a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of cover base 542 in rear view, respectively. , So that static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the distribution of game balls can be removed.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the upper plate 301 is full, if the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side of the full tank 773 is also full, game balls flow to the full tank passage 775 through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 72), and the full tank branch unit 770 From the full sphere outlet 776 to the second sphere inlet 542c, the second sphere passage 542d, and the second sphere outlet of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 44b.

  Then, when the inside of the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 becomes full of game balls, the game balls cannot come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 and stay in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and many game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the stored pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank switch 550, that is, when the accommodation space 546 is full with the stored game balls, the payout control board 4110 moves the game ball from the prize ball unit 700. Is stopped, and a notification is issued to the player to prompt the player to discharge the game balls in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank switch 550 is not performed. The detection is made, and the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[3-10. Ball feeding unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 51 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the rear case removed and viewed from the rear. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and play the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The lower plate 302 can be pulled out by operating the upper plate puller button 341 of the upper plate puller 340.

  In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110, and in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, a front end of the front cover 581 being closed and a front end being opened. A rear cover 582 having a hit ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball which has a box shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction and penetrates from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hit ball launching device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition 583a that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front and rear covers 581 and 581a and 581b at the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removing member 583 and the game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to a ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and a shaft extending vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the ball feeding member 584 and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a when viewed from the front, and the ball removing member 583 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is provided on the right side thereof. Each is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 described later extends forward from 581c. The front cover 581 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper bowl removing base 344. It is formed so as to close.

  In addition, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a below the entrance 581a and between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball sending member 584, and a partition portion 583a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, with the lower end extending around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 51), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. The upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper dish removing slider 343 in the upper dish removing mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is contacted via 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. The ball holding portion 584b has a concave shape in an arc shape from the rear end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 to move the rod 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation to the left and right. ing.

  The ball feeding member 584 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a and a direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces in the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650, and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball to the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partitioning portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 580 includes a ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 585, and a front and rear movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 which swings vertically. And a ball-feeding crank 587 for rotating the ball-feeding member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction while rotating about an axis extending in the direction. The ball feed crank 587 is capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and is provided with an engagement portion 587a extending in the left-right direction, and a side of the engagement portion 587a with which the ball feed operation rod 586 is engaged. A shaft 587b that is disposed on the opposite side and that is rotatably supported around an axis that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582; and a ball feeding member 584 that extends upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 52) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation. In this embodiment, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feeding unit 580 rotates the ball feeding member 584 by transmitting the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 586 that is rocked by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 that moves up and down by the ball feeding operating rod 586 and the ball feeding crank 587. It can be moved. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip at which the ball feeding operating rod 586 swings away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip that swings is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released from driving (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the ball. The game balls are sent (supplied) to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 583d, but projects forward. When the operating rod 583c is brought into contact with the upper end of the abutting piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 in the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 of the tray unit 300, its rotation is regulated. In this configuration, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that game balls do not enter the ball outlet 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 downward, the upper tray removing slider 343 slides down together with the contact piece 343a to make contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  As described above, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the abutting piece 343a of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340, the bowl removing member 583 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the entrance by the partitioning portion 583a. The partition between the ball opening 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered through the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball discharging channel 344c of the upper plate ball discharging base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 contacts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is supplied to the partition portion 583a vigorously. In addition, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, so that the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be prevented from being damaged. The partition 583a can be prevented from bouncing off.

[3-11. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 590 includes an annular unit frame 592 having an opening approximately the same size as the game window 101 and formed of a synthetic resin and having a vertically long octagonal shape, and two sheets closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a which are arranged at both left and right ends in a vertically separated manner and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate extending in the left and right direction along the lower end and extending downward. 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage with the vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from above and behind. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stopper piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame is locked. It is configured to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 23, FIG. 26, etc.).

  As described above, the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically elliptical gaming window 101. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101, on the right side of the lower plate 302 when viewed from the front. Handle device 500 is arranged. In the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the right, left, and upper sides of the gaming window 101, and surround the lower side of the gaming window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower end of the right side decoration unit 200 and the lower end of the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. The appearance is continuous and integrated.

  In addition, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 and the like provided in the units 200, 220, 280, and 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. Light emission decoration can be performed in an arbitrary emission color so as to surround the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328. Also, of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 220, the LEDs are provided on the rear side of the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on and off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256, it is possible to change the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the gaming window 101.

  Specifically, the light emission mode of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250, and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the emission lens units 210b and 250b. If the light emission mode is the same (light emission color and light emission pattern are the same), it is possible to make the light emission decoration substantially uniform as a whole, and if the light emission modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. When the light emitting decoration is made, it is possible to make the light emitting decoration such that the light emitting decoration is broken in the circumferential direction. It can be a luminous decoration, which can attract the interest of the player.

  The door frame 5 has a base member 420 for supporting the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 made of an aluminum alloy by die-casting. Because the operation unit mounting portion 314c is hung, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so as to be bent, and the base member 420 is moved downward. It comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c via the cover 424, so that the impact on the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, and the like can be reduced, and the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged. I can do it.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the door frame 5 has the pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring-shaped dial operation unit 401, and even if a player or the like tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also attached. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the impact struck by the dial operation unit 401, to prevent the impact from being concentrated, and to make it hard to break. Further, the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from below from the upper surface, and the dial operation is performed. When the impact of striking the portion 401 is transmitted to the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410, and the operating portion holding member 416 bends downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 forms the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the impact can be received by the base member 420 by contacting the upper surface, the load on the operation portion holding member 416 can be reduced, and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased.

  Further, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from above, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the replacement of the unit 400.

[3-12. Light-emitting decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. FIG. 54 is a front view showing a system of light emitting decoration LEDs in the door frame. The door frame 5 of this embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of the units 200, 240, 280, and 300 includes a decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 on which an LED is mounted. Can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except for the lower side of the game window 101, and the plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250 are formed. The lens units 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens units 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered on the lower center of the gaming window 101 in the left-right center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to the lens. The peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 are formed by light-impermeable (in the present embodiment, a plating layer on the surface) side decorative frames 202, 242. The outer periphery is surrounded.

  Behind these side lenses 210, 250, side inner lenses 212, 252 are arranged. The side inner lenses 212, 252 have main bodies 212a, 252a with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens parts 210a, 250a. It is formed so as to be at a position separated by a predetermined distance, and formed so that the plate-shaped light guide portions 212b and 252b extend as close as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. Have been. Although not shown in detail, the body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface thereof, and decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can be diffused.

  The right side upper decorative board 214, the right side lower decorative board 216, the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side lower decorative board 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It has LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens units 210b, 250b. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the radiation lens units 210b and 250b are white LEDs (upper part). The normal luminance is lower than the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the decorative unit 280. The two LEDs 214c vertically arranged corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side decorative substrate 214 are red LEDs.

  In the present embodiment, the surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 are made of white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk). Printing), white paint, etc. As a result, the reflectivity of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating the appearance, and to reflect light emitted from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b and the like toward the player side by the substrate, thereby improving the side view. The lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission more brightly.

  Next, as described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects the ends of the upper portions of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is designed to decorate the upper center of the gaming window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 has a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on the upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 disposed. The center lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed by a bluish transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed by a translucent white (milky white) member. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the center lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface thereof, and can diffuse and diffuse light. When the inner lens 283 is viewed, the central lens 282 appears to be deep and the central lens 282 itself appears to be glittering. Further, the upper decorative board 286 arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not seen from the player side.

  On the upper decorative board 286 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) LEDs 286a corresponding to the center lens 282 and arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are provided. A plurality of LEDs 286b (two in the present embodiment, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, respectively, are arranged on the rear side) are provided on the rear side. In the present embodiment, the LED 286a corresponding to the center lens 282 is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-luminance white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also made white, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the plurality of jewel-shaped light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper plate 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 to each other. The front decoration member 316 is arranged in a row so as to be exposed through the opening 316a, and when viewed from the front, as shown in the figure, the lower edge of the gaming window 101 is formed by the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper lens 318 as shown. (Lower side) is designed to be decorated. Below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a protrusion corresponding to each light guide 318a is arranged. The upper plate upper lens 318 of the plate unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper plate inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper plate upper inner lens 319 of the plate unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318, and diffuses or diffuses light. As in the case of the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is given a deep taste and a brilliant shine to guide the light. The light part 318a is made to look like a jewel. The upper plate upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 arranged on the lower side are not visible through the light guide 318a from the player side by the upper plate upper inner lens 319.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality (six in the present embodiment) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this embodiment, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are full color LEDs. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation unit 401 and a light-transmitting cylindrical pressing operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are arranged below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of LEDs 430b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. The button decoration board 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In the present embodiment, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a high-luminance white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214a and 216a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101, respectively. , 254a, 256a include a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 53 and 54) close to the gaming window 101 and a second annular group 103 (FIG. 53) disposed outside the first annular group 102. 54, and within the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 54, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are appropriately illuminated, so that a plurality of LEDs (approximately concentrically) surround the game window 101. In this embodiment, two) light-emitting decoration can be performed. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the area of the hatch near the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated annularly, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the second annular group 103 are turned on. When all light is emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is decoratively lighted in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the radiation lenses 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are connected to the first annular group 102 and the second ring group. A radial group 104 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 53 and 54) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the two-ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated. The luminous decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction. The LEDs 214c corresponding to the upper right side sub-lens 228 in the right side decoration unit 200 are formed as the upper right side group 105. The portion (side sub lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the center lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101, emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, and emits light. It is a group 106. By appropriately lighting the LED 286a of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated. In addition, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be used as reference points for annular luminescent decoration. It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. The LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 for emitting and illuminating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 emits light as appropriate, so that the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated or decorated, and the upper side (including the upper part) of the gaming window 101. , So that the light-emitting decoration can be made in a V-shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted into the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300 for decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322a form a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower edge of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be illuminated, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be illuminated. , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 can be light-emitting decorated.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the game window 101 and at the upper center of the plate unit 300, operate the operation unit 400. An operation unit group 109 for light emission decoration is provided. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be notified.

  The light-emitting decoration of the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. , 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong, corresponding to the control systems. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided with 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250. Have been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the radial lens units 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems: a lower part 106a, an upper right part 106b, and an upper left part 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in three from the right side in front view. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation unit group 109 are composed of an LED 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as one set of left and right 109a. One LED 432c corresponding to two systems 109b and one pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems, one system. As described above, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 322a, and 322a. The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs further include three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. This is 84 times the number of systems. Also, the LEDs 286b and 430b are high-luminance white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected to each other, and in actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled to eight.

  Note that the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs of normal brightness and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b constituted by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, and therefore, the same number of ten systems is provided in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems under the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting and blinking are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to perform an expressive light-emitting effect.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is sequentially emitted from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequentially in the same color or a similar color) to spread outward around the gaming window 101. A light emission effect, or conversely, a light emission effect such that light is converged from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light (same color or similar color) from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102, Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light at the same time, so that a light emission effect or the like can be performed such that the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000, the LED of the game board 4 and the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101 are provided. And, by the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, It is possible to keep the player from having fun and to reduce the interest.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light is circulated around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 by appropriately emitting light from the respective systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 108a to 108d. Such a light emitting effect, such that light moves toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light is transmitted from the central lens 282 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. Lighting effects such as moving can be performed. In the present embodiment, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are circumferentially divided into ten systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the system is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emission effect in which light orbits the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, and simultaneously with the radial group 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 emit light. The light emitting effect of causing the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly by emitting the light, and the radial group 104 emitting light (lighting / flashing) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are annular. Or a luminous effect for giving an accent to the luminous decoration of the illuminated decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, a light emission effect such that the radial lens units 210b and 250b orbit can be provided.

  In addition, the light emission effect in which the entire central lens 282 emits light by simultaneously illuminating the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and the light rotates in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from the respective systems 106a to 106c. Luminous effects can be performed. Also, by causing the upper center side group 107 to emit light, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and illuminated with high luminance, so that a chance is given to the player or a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state, a certain State, time-saving game state, probability-changing time-saving game state, etc.). Note that the lower lens 289 is arranged so as to emit light from above the player toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

  Further, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect of emitting and decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 or emitting light in association with the operation unit group 109 can be provided. It is possible to perform a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. Also, by appropriately emitting light from the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit group 109, a light emission effect for prompting operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guiding the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. Can be. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit group 109 to emit light, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be provided.

  In addition, since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation unit group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108 , 109, or for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, it is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission colors and brightness. An expressive luminous effect can be performed.

  As described above, in the door frame 5, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a are connected to the first annular group 102 near the gaming window 101. And the second annular group 103 distant from the gaming window 101 outside the first annular group 102 so as to be able to emit light, so that a plurality of substantially concentric circles are formed outside the gaming window 101 (game area 1100). The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be decorated in a light-emitting manner, and by surrounding the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 with light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that is not available in conventional pachinko gaming machines, and to attract the player's interest strongly. And can be.

  Further, in one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a, two systems of LEDs arranged substantially concentrically are provided, and even though the appearance looks like one, each of the two systems of LEDs emits light. Since the light-emitting decoration can be substantially concentrically formed, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the mode of the light-emitting decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit) by the light-emitting decoration. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can increase the impact of the luminous decoration and attract the player's attention.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 57 is a front perspective view of the body frame, and FIG. 58 is a rear perspective view of the body frame. Further, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a left side supported by the outer frame 2 when viewed from the front. The front side is opened and closed by a door frame 5. The main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for holding the game board 4, and a front face of the main body frame base 600. An upper bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side portion of the view and supported by the outer frame 2 and supporting the door frame 5, respectively, and a lower front surface of the main body frame base 600. And a prize for paying out a game ball to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main frame base 600, and a ball launching device 650 mounted on the game board 4 for driving game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. A ball unit 700 and a ball outlet mounted on the front surface of the body frame base 600 and blocking the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3. Opening and closing It is provided with a knit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and various control boards for controlling electric components provided on the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. , A back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front to open and close the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and open and close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[4-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 62 is a rear perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and has a front-rear direction. It is formed to have a fixed depth. As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding portion capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within about 3/4 of the entire range from the upper part to the lower part. The mouth 601, a U-shaped front end frame 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side when viewed from the front, and the front end of the front end frame 602 is recessed from the front to the rear. Door frame projection 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of 110, upper bent projection 167 projecting rearward of upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in reinforcing unit 150 of door frame 5, and open side projecting rearward of open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engagement groove 603 into which the outer bent protruding piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  The lower part of the main frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame part 602 and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604; The free end portions (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall section 604 and has a game board placement section 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement section 606. A positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 when viewed from the front. A game board engaging portion 608 (see FIG. 55) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate-like shape which is suspended downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 is fitted to the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the backward direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate that the right side of the game board 4 in the front view is moved in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. I have. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is regulated by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with metal fittings for mounting the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 on the rear surface of the free end (upper left and right ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. A portion 610 is provided (see FIG. 62). As shown in FIG. 61 and the like, this bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced at its front side with a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, and is used to mount the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 with sufficient strength. Is available. The main body frame base 600 has a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and a door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. And a U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning projection 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base body 110, and houses the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front. And a solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step behind the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front, The hit ball firing device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the hit ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 57, FIG. A fale space 626 extending downward is formed. In this embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The played game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has an opening 614 that penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left from the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and a plurality of openings are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 59 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692 to pass through the lower rear wall portion 604. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. Note that the through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having a front wall.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support section rotatably supporting a game board fixing tool 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 to the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the fixture supporter 616 when viewed from the front and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis supported by the fixing tool supporting portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end in the circumferential direction (a side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixing piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board placement part 606, and is inserted into the fixing recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement part 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. The game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the pivoting end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted by coming into contact with the stopper 617. Has become.

  Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. The body frame base 600 is provided with a body frame opening switch 619 for detecting opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that penetrate vertically (in the front-rear direction) inwardly (in the shaft support side) from the engagement grooves 603 on the right (open side) side in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock hole 621 penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and arranged side by side in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are formed near the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially at the center in the vertical direction. The upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the locking holes 621 are engaged with locking projections 1004 provided on both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in front view in FIG. When the lock device 1000 is mounted on the body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through-hole 611 (see FIG. 57).

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is gently and obliquely lowered from the upper right end toward the center in the left-right direction, as viewed from the rear, on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then at the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a main frame base ball extraction passage 622 from which the game balls can flow down from the middle in the up-down direction to a slightly upward position. The rear side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 is closed by the substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800. As will be described later in detail, game balls flowing through the ball passage 741d of the prize ball device 740 are used. It is being distributed.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in rear view, and the back cover shaft support portions 623 rotatably support the support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting part 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front left side of the opening 614 on the front side of the lower rear wall part 604, and the lock device 1000 on the right side (opening side) of the peripheral wall part 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like are appropriately located on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[4-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal mount mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear ends of the main body frame base 600 in a front view using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with the outer frame 2.

  First, the upper bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like mounting portion 631 extending forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. A front extension 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. Frame support holes 634 (see FIG. 57 and the like) penetrating in the up-down direction into which the door frame 5 is inserted. A stopper (not shown) for regulating the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 640 includes a door frame support 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a body support 3 that is disposed below the door frame support 642 and supports the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support 644 for performing the operation. The door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-shaped front extension 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension 642b, and a front extension. And a stopper 642d that stands upward from the left end of the front view 642b when viewed from the front and regulates the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft bracket 642, a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The main frame support 644 of the lower support 640 is attached to a metal mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions. A front extension portion 644b extending forward, and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b. Also in the main frame support 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft bracket 640 is in a state where the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft bracket 644 are overlapped (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame shaft bracket is mounted. The front extending portion 642b of the main body frame base 600 and the front extending portion 642b of the main frame supporting member 644 are vertically spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. ing.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pins 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the body frame shaft support holes (not shown) of the lower shaft support 640. Are positioned coaxially, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the body frame shaft support 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20, the main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  When the upper bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft bracket 640 are provided. The hole 642c is located coaxially with the door so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640. After placing the lower shaft support 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension 642 b of the door frame support 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. Is temporarily slid downward so that the upper shaft support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper shaft support 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[4-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball firing device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 is capable of driving game balls supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment has a launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654 a protruding forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652. The launching solenoid 654 is mounted so as to be mounted, a hammer 656 fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a hammer 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and movement of the hammer 658. A hammer at the tip of a ball hitting hammer 656 extending between a firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left in front view and attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and a firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660 with a predetermined position on the locus as a base end. At the same time that the tip 658 is allowed to pass, a gap is formed in which the game ball cannot pass, and the game ball is held at the base end of the firing rail 660. The turning piece 656 (tip 658) is restricted from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from a hitting position at which the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the stopping piece 662 and the ball stopping piece 662 can be hit. And a stopper 664 that performs the operation.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured so that the rotation drive shaft 654a reciprocates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. . The hitting hammer 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a gentle arc extending from the fixed portion 656a to a tip of the rotation drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a hammer tip 658 is fixed at the tip in the normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side with respect to the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664; It has. When the stopper 656c of the hitting hammer 656 contacts the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 is rotated more toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is being regulated.

  The firing rail 660 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is formed in a loose arc shape with its lower part depressed substantially along the extension of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 87), and also in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped concave shape, and the game ball hit by the ball hammer 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting ball firing device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a rotation end of the hitting hammer 656 toward the hitting position side, and a rotation of the hitting hammer 656 that is away from the hitting position. A stopper 668 for regulating an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in front view). The hitting ball firing device 650 has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, can absorb the impact when the hitting hammer 656 contacts, and can suppress the generation of noise due to the contacting. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 57, FIG. 87, and the like, when the hitting ball firing device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially at the center in the left-right direction and the lower rear wall portion is formed. The upper end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held at the game board holding port 601, that is, below the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601). Between the lower end, a foul space 626 extending downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launch rail 660, so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball which has not been driven into the ball but falls into the foul space 626 falls, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4130 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. Is driven in synchronization with the driving of Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies game balls to the hitting ball firing device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives game balls, and from that state, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven. Is released (OFF), the ball sending member 584 sends the received game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650 side, so that the firing solenoid 654 is driven simultaneously with the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 ( ON), the game balls can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game balls can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting hammer 656. I have.

[4-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded view from behind. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and viewed later. FIG. 71 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the gaming balls supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the pachinko island equipment side in the pachinko island equipment in the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. It pays out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 600 and a prize ball tank mounted on the rear upper portion of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the pachinko island equipment side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a game ball arranged by the tank rail unit 730 to a predetermined position. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching the game balls to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a rear cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the rear cover 900 on a rear surface thereof (see FIG. 68).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. Along with the arrangement, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. An external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding opening 601 in front view. And are integrally formed of a synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends substantially rearward along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a with a predetermined width and is disposed on substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and can form a space in which the game board 4 can be accommodated when attached to the main body frame base 600. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a prize ball tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 disposed next to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). And an external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the external terminal plate cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the lower rear side of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 on the rear side of the vertical side, and a prize ball passage 715 that guides a game ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 downward. And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full branch unit 770 to the lower end of the rear wall portion 710b.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 has an escape hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and a back surface. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted in the prize ball base 710, mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, and the like, and mounting the prize ball base on the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open top, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and protrudes rearwardly from the bottom wall 721 in a rectangular shape only in a right rear portion (opening rear) in plan view; A discharge port 723 that is formed by a portion that protrudes rearward from a bottom wall portion 721 at the right rear portion of the outlet port 722 and that opens downward. Eaves portion 724, a bar-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side of the eaves portion 724 in plan view, and award balls formed near the base end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall portion 722. Put the tank 720 on the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Also, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 becomes lower toward the discharge port 723, and the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and can level and align game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially half of the upper side of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from inside the tank rail unit 730, It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the outlet 723) in plan view becomes lower toward the right side, and The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in a plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, the occurrence of clogging of the balls in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and at the same time, from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. Gaming balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 is a gutter-like shape having a predetermined depth with an open upper portion, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so that is lower. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 72) that opens downward at the left end (supporting side), a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a front lower surface. A plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 67) projecting further downward and locked from above from the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710. The right side (open side) of the tank rail 731 in front view is located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is provided. After being received, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the prize ball base 710 by locking the locking projection 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the attachment locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710. ing.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with an aligning gear 732 rotatably supported above the outlet 731a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper part of the aligning gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in a front view. A ball pressing plate 734 for closing the upper part of the tank rail 731; and a ball stopper which can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 so as to be able to contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls divided in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stopper 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in a vertical direction and through which a protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. I can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that were not at one level by the ball leveling member 727 one level, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

  The alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery as shown in the drawing, and is axially supported so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by a half pitch. Thereby, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the downstream outlet 731a while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows alternately one by one. It is sent to the device 740.

  It should be noted that a narrow groove which penetrates up and down is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded externally via a grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via a grounding metal 782, though not shown in detail. When the game ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the attachment part 734a of the ball holding plate 734, so that the protruding piece 735a of the ball stopper 735 passes through the slit 734b, and the inside of the tank rail 731. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding pieces 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. I have.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Things. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 mounted on the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 has a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear side and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction at a width slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and communicating with a lower end (open side) of the distribution space 741b on the rear side of the rear surface (open side). A prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (the pivot side) when viewed from the rear and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, a plate-like motor support plate 743 disposed below the back cover 742, and A payout motor 744 fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a is disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and projects rearward from the motor support plate 743, and can be integrally rotated with the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744. A first gear 745 fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743; a second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 and supported by the unit base 741; and a unit base 741 meshing with the second gear 746. Gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit and the payout rotator 7 that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741 b of the unit base 741. 8 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed on the opposite side with respect to the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection slits 749a are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. A detection board 749.

  The prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball attached to the unit base 741 and flowing down the prize ball passage 741c. , A rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a formed in a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotator 748, and a back cover 742 holding the rotation angle switch 752. A relay mounted on the rear surface of the back cover 742 through the connection of the rotation angle switch board 753 attached to the rear surface, the payout motor 744, the ball cutout switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the connection between the rotation angle switch 752 and the payout control substrate 4110. And a substrate 754 in a spherical case.

  Furthermore, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the substrate 754 in the prize ball case from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection board). 749) and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiching the rotation angle switch board 753 from the rear side, and a game ball flowing in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 can be contacted. A supply passage grounding metal 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and a grounding connection for the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 detachable from the unit base 741. And a detachable button 759 supported by the

  In the prize ball device 740, the back lid 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the open rear ends of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d are closed. It has become so. The unit base 741 has a shape in which a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, and can relieve the momentum of the game balls discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730. You can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 is partially cut out on one side (left side in rear view) below the position of the supply passage 741a that swells rearward, and is outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball cutout switch 750, a switch mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting switch 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear side penetrating below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By mounting the cut-out switch 750 on the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the cut-out switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence / absence of a playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the switch 750. In a state in which the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball-out switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate, and it is determined that the ball has run out. It is to be notified to the side.

  The unit base 741 is provided between the bearing 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748) and the switch mounting part 741e in the supply passage 741a and the distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j that is provided on the unit base 741 and supports a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742. Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 can be brought into contact with a game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage grounding metal 757 to the grounding metal mounting portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 comes into contact with the rear end of the lower end of the U-shaped grounding metal 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply passage 741a via the supply passage grounding metal 757 is removed. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and an upper end bulging rearward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball case board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board at the upper part of the back cover 742. A rotation angle switch substrate mounting portion 742c for mounting the rotation angle switch substrate 753 disposed below the mounting portion 742b and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the grounding metal mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

  In the present embodiment, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is formed of an aluminum plate so as to come into contact with a metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and the heat generated by the payout motor 744. Can be easily dissipated.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. As the 748 rotates, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. In addition, three detection slits 749 a formed on a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detecting board 749, and the rotation of the payout rotating body 748. The rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected by detecting the detection slit 749a by the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749 (the payout rotating body 748) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 18 steps.

  The prize ball device 740 rotates the payout motor 744 by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit, or the like to the payout control board 4110, or operating the ball removal switch 860b. Thus, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko game machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 rotates. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gear rotates. A payout rotator 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747 and a rotation detection board 749 is fixed to the rear side thereof so that the payout rotator 748 and the rotation detection board 749 can be rotated together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation of the payout rotator 748 is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 744.

  In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 71, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated clockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side. The game balls dispensed toward the ball removal passage 741d by the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged to the rear outside through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 67, 68 and 72. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to a substantially central upper portion in the front-rear direction at a locking portion 770a locked to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710, and at a rear upper portion to the lower surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the fixed portion 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  As shown in the drawing, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving game balls flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 72). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 72) for guiding the game ball from immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to front the front end. A normal ball exit 774 opened at the right end of the view, and a full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball forward from a position further to the right in rear view than immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward at the left end of the upper rear end in front view and receives a game ball flowing down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball passage 778 (see FIG. 72) for guiding the game ball received by the withdrawal opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball discharge passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball exit 774 and a normal ball exit 774 are provided at the left end in front view. And a ball ejection port 779 opened at a position behind the full tank exit 776.

  When the full tank branch unit 770 closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first ball inlet 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540, and communicates with the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the bowl and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball ejection port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the rear view of the main body frame base 600. Is transferred to the body frame base ball passage 622.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes from the first ball outlet 544a to the plate unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that cannot escape from the upper plate 301 from the side 544a stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves in the horizontal direction. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, under the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  As described above, when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full game balls are released. Since it can be supplied to the plate 302, the upper plate becomes full as in a conventional pachinko game machine and the ball release button on the upper plate is operated, so that the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball firing device and the game ball is not supplied. Can be prevented from being interrupted, the troublesomeness during the game can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be prevented from lowering.

  As described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branching unit 770 branches the path of the game balls to be dispensed immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the game balls stayed in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are directly hit by the hitting ball firing device 650. The storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko game machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be provided. In addition to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a high appeal to a player who plays the game, the player can enjoy the game with a wide game area 1100.

[4-5. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 73 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is mounted on a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in front view of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. Of the game ball can be cut off.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 in front view so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 held in a shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing shutter 792 ascending via the opening / closing crank 793. And an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the opening / closing spring.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in a front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed on the front surface of a left end portion in a front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in a front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed near the upper left portion from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding projections (not shown) which project from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in sliding grooves 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally-long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank supporting portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view. A drive rod 793b extending outward to the right and extending to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and is slidably inserted into a drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 projecting rearward from the distal end of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a lower front view and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of an opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface in the middle of the drive rod 793b. ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking the same.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates vertically in an arc by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c is inserted. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides up and down through the drive hole 792b. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is rotated clockwise in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated clockwise in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening / closing shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

  In this way, in response to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are automatically set by the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776. You can do it.

[4-6. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 80A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 80B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear face of the board unit base 810 when viewed from the front, and a board unit base 810. A power supply board box 830 attached to the rear right side of the right end of the power supply board 810, a power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820; And payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front panel 860 when viewed from the front, and a main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810. Have.

  As shown, the board unit base 810 of the board unit 800 is elongated in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped down one step and gently inclines upward toward the left and right ends, so that the front is forward from the front. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding to the front, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above a position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction in the shielding wall portion 811 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front view below the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end for mounting the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a tube penetrating in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in a front view. Duct portion 814 and a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped transparent portions penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the lower speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. And 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game balls can be prevented from falling down from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-back direction. You can do it.

  In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side through the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It has come to face. The board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side through the duct 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is provided with a lower speaker 821 which is literally attached to the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinthine passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound on the rear side of the lower speaker 821. A bass reflex type speaker box that emits a deeper sound with respect to the aperture of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well to the front. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are provided. A combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge from the ball is driven by supplying a current to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650. In this firing power supply board box 830, slits 830a as heat radiation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the firing power supply board box 830 to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing. Since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a slit 830a as a heat radiation hole is formed on a side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed. . Further, the firing power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b for dividing the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Is formed integrally from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the lower surface and the inner wall of the lower surface. Thus, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 to close the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b is provided with a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside via 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored. Therefore, heat generated by electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is formed as heat radiation holes formed on the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the housing space 830d with the outside air. Is released to the outside through the slit 830a, so that the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, heat generated by DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. The downsizing of the launch power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle and facilitates the replacement work of the launch power supply board 831, which can contribute to shortening the time spent in the replacement work. In this replacement work, the state in which the firing power supply board 831 is still attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830, that is, the entire firing power supply board box 830 can be replaced. Also, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its end of life and the driving and firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 can be performed. Since the game can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be eliminated at an early stage to resume the game.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is deteriorated and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute every time the driving and firing are performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 generates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the pachinko island facility, but does not repeatedly charge and discharge at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Compared with, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration caused by the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851, so that the lifetime is improved. Electronic components associated with the long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electronic component from being replaced with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life because of the long-life aging.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game ball discharged upward and discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the left front side from the center in the right and left directions when viewed from the front. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging the same, and a front surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box receiving portion 843 which is opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830, and a front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is depressed forward. And a rear box storage portion 844 that can store the data.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and that the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. It flows through the body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810, and the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, are passed through the discharge passage 842 to the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

  Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and transfers heat from the electronic components and the like to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 79, a power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed such that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush.

  The dispensing control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has an open rear, and a thin box-shaped cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear and is open at the front. 862, and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 97) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Also, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation and cutting portions 863 protruding outward from the left end in rear view and formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated without cutting the separation cutting section 863. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace is left. . Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the dispensing control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an output terminal for inspection 860c, and the like attached to the dispensing control board 4110 face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 56). ). In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 and a frame peripheral relay terminal 872 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 and having the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 fixed rearward. A board 868, a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 to which a CR unit relay terminal 873 is fixed rearwardly attached to a rear surface of the substrate base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal 872, and a CR unit relay terminal 873. And a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the substrate base 871 so as to face the side. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying an operation state or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko gaming machine facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and is a CR unit relay. The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are provided with a peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying connection with the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to a substrate mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to face from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are configured such that the front sides thereof are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the relay terminal plate cover 692 Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance (see FIG. 55 and the like).

  In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball lending button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side and each of the decorative boards 430, 432 and the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and switches 432a, 432b, 432c and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[4-7. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 81B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes a rear opening of the game board holding opening 601, a side 904 that extends forward from a right side of the main body 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction, project downward, and are supported by the back cover support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls formed on the upper left and lower left sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 is provided to engage with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, respectively.

  The back cover 900 also has a connection notch 910 cut upward in a rectangular shape at the right lower end of the main body 902 in a front view, and a horizontally elongated rectangular shape along the lower side on the left side of the connection notch 910 in a front view. The main body 902 includes a confirmation opening 912 and a confirmation notch 914 that is cut in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

  The back cover 900 can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. 908 is engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the main frame base 600 and the prize ball passage cover 780, whereby the closed state can be achieved. Although not shown in detail, the left side of the back cover 900 when viewed from the front is the rear surface of the prize ball unit 700 by a predetermined screw in addition to the engagement between the engagement pieces 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a. Is to be fixed to.

  The back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 so that the RAM clear switch 4100e and the test terminal 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 face the rear side through the connection notch 910. It has become. In the back cover 900, the hermetic seal (not shown) of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the main control board box 1170 passes through the notch 914 for confirmation. Sealing portion 1176 faces. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the operation check and the appearance check of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portions 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is used for the main body frame 3 (the pachinko gaming machine 1). Can be discharged to the outside of the rear side.

[4-8. Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U-shape in a plan view, a mounting bracket 954 fixed vertically up and down near the inner front end of the main body 952, and mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed inside the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 has a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the up-down direction and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b and projecting less than the front end piece 952b, and a front end from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction as viewed. The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d.

  The side security plate 950 has a mounting bracket 954 mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and a rear end piece 952 d of the main body 952 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the side security plate 950 is configured such that the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 to prevent insertion of a tool for performing wrongdoing between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. Can be done. The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c and a middle piece 952c arranged at right angles to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported. It has become.

[4-9. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and FIG. 82 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 83 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 83 (B) is a slide rod for the glass door frame and a slide for the main frame which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows a rod, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device when disassembled, and FIG. 85 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. A door hook hole 620 formed on the upper right side (opening side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 and a lock hole 621 formed on the lower portion thereof, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600 And a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. A sliding rod 1040, a main frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and a U-shaped sliding rod 1050 so that the sliding of the main frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally performed. Anti-fraud members 1023, 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and has therein a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame. Are slidably disposed. It should be noted that the U-shaped base 1001 is much thinner in width than the conventional locking device integrated into a base formed into an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, thereby further increasing the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is mounted with the open side of the U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed by the body frame base 600. Thus, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-fraud structure in which it is difficult to perform an illegal act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through-opening 1002, a screw stop 1003 protruding outward in the middle and above the side surface 1001 b (see FIG. 84) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw stop A side surface 1001a (see FIG. 84) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protrusion 1003 protrudes is protruded forward from an upper end portion and a middle portion on the open side (front side), and from lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. Locking projection 1004.

  The screw stopper 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When inserted upward from the rear side after being inserted into the lock hole 621, the screwing portion 1003 and the locking portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625 via the intermediary, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking of the lock device 1000 by screws is performed not only at the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also at the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 to be described later and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The locking device 625 is also fixed to the body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), so that the lower portion of the locking device 1000 can also be mounted.

  When the lock device 1000 is mounted, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are engaged with the upper door hook hole 620 and the upper locking hole. 621, and is positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. (The body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that is not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close to the peripheral wall portion 605 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling, as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is close to the side surface 1001b.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion hole 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the main frame sliding rod 1050 housed therein and caulking, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably mounted vertically.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower portions of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 formed respectively in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side face 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the open body frame base 600, and the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side face at the bottom. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 and a vertical insertion opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed in a side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605. Although the details of the notch prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 has the side surface 1001b so that the lock device 1000 is positioned lower than the lower end side of the game board holding opening 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009 that projects from the front end to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and two mounting holes 1013 formed on the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 by screws 1012 are provided at upper and lower positions. And a screw stop 1003 formed to mount the lower portion of the lock device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement projection 1017 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a lateral escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to hinder the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is mounted on the lock mounting piece 1008 on the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. The engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotated. The end side is a second engaging projection 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 during rotation.

  The cylinder lock 1010 is formed by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and then mounting holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower positions of the lock attachment board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the through hole.

  The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 are provided with a sliding rod 1050 for the body frame, for example, using a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. Is to prevent the lowering of. As shown in FIG. 84, the anti-fraud members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 are connected by connecting pins 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved through the pivot shaft hole 1025 together with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower mounting hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are used for mounting.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically opened at a position overlapping with the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-shaped surface, and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. When the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. And the second engagement projection 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided on the outer side obliquely above the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 at an obliquely upper side which can abut on the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. When the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first tamper-proof member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. (In the clockwise direction in FIG. 86 (B)).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is further provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer side obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 toward the U-shaped base 1001 and further from the position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A regulating protrusion 1031 protruding downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that penetrate in the left-right direction at the front side of the regulating protrusion 1031 and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 when the main frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame from sliding illegally. In addition, the regulating protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  The pin hole 1029 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 has a guide pin 1028 inserted and fixed from the back side of the first anti-fraud member 1023. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Is available. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second anti-fraud member 1032 connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 is formed of an inverted “L” -shaped plate, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring engagement hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second anti-fraud member 1032 can be relatively rotatably connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first anti-fraud member 1023. You can do it. In addition, the second tamper-proof member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 is urged upward. Further, the contact portion 1037 of the second anti-fraud member 1032 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the lower inside of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with three door frame hook portions 1041 protruding forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the lock device 1000 projects forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 57 and 61) formed in the main body frame base 600, and The hook 5 can be engaged with a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. The hook portion 1041 for the door frame has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet long hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and a lower part of the uppermost rivet long hole 1042 and a door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, there is provided a guide protruding piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to allow the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 and the rivet 1006 to slide the door frame sliding. The rod 1040 is formed to be vertically long so as not to hinder the ascent operation of the rod 1040. In a normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 is in a state of contact. In addition, the guide rod 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. , And can guide the mutual sliding operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

  Further, the sliding hook 1040 for the door frame has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at an upper end thereof for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward. Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame includes a contact elastic piece 1047 that is formed in the middle of the vertical direction in a convex shape, and is punched out from one side surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and can prevent the door frame sliding rod 1040 from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for a door frame has a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the distal end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to hinder the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is adapted to rotate the door frame sliding rod 1040 by the rotation of the engagement cam 1016. For engaging with. In addition, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame includes a relief notch 1049 that is notched in the vertical direction to be larger than the tamper-proof notch 1007 in the lower rear portion of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 is provided by the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is securely engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding parts have been cut out so as not to be disturbed.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of one vertical metal plate as in the related art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connecting rod 1053. Accordingly, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of a vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates through the hook through-opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper side on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward.

  The rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed on the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with 1050.

  The spring hook 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. The connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, when the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001. It can slide smoothly without backlash.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from a lower end portion and a rivet penetrating in the left and right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. A long hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 disposed below the rivet long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the lower engagement hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connection hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the lower hook member 1052 at the front end side, and a coupling formed at the lower part of the lower vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint notch 1066 and contact portions 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates through the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side inside of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the sliding movement of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation. For engagement. The play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is provided with the second engagement projection 1018 so that the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 does not hinder the rotation when the second engagement projection 1018 is inserted. Is able to form a space in which the tip end can move. In addition, the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

  Also, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, when the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 performs a sliding operation, the hook member 1052 can be smoothly slid without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056, 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the long rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet long hole 1055, 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the superposed state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook through-opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 while the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main frame. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, insert the rivet 1006 through the insertion hole 1005. .

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected with the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. It is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing it to the 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Further, in a state where the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame are stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 with the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions to each other, and a spring 1035 is wrapped around the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the regulating protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement projection of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the hook portion 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the hook hole 620 for the door formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the hook-shaped locking projection 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw stopper 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is moved. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by making it coincide with the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while fixing the rear portion. Since the screw stopper 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, the locking structure of the front part contacts the peripheral wall 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 85, in a state where the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hooks 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the door frame 5. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The distal end of the first engagement projection 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is released, and the main frame 3 is removed by pulling the main frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 85A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside. Forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2 causes the upper slopes of the hook portions 1054, 1065 to be closed. Since the slide rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered downward because of the contact with the lower end, the upwardly-facing claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, and the slide for the main body frame is performed. The rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the two engagement projections 1018 engages with the ascending engagement holes 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push up and move the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hooked state of the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are released, the door frame 5 is pulled forward by pulling the door frame 5 forward. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 85A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is upwardly inclined toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3 so that the inclined portion of the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 becomes the hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward by contacting the upper end of the door frame, and the downwardly-facing claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are again locked, so that the sliding for the door frame is performed. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. In addition, the sliding rod 1040 for a door frame in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hooks 1041, which are attached over the entire length and are locking portions with the door frame 5, are formed at three places of an upper end, a center, and a lower end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 over the entire length in the vertical direction, and to forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the gap therebetween. The act cannot be performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the door frame 5 can be unlocked from the main body frame 3. Further, the lock device 1000 cannot perform an illegal act such that a piano wire or the like is hooked on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowered without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. It has become. The first structure for preventing such misconduct is a lock mechanism including a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032, and the second fraud preventing structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism as the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 abut. It is in a state where it has been done. In this state, the first anti-fraud member 1023 rotates counterclockwise by the urging force of the spring 1035, and the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is moved to the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even when the piano wire or the like is hooked and pulled down on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, since the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 are engaged, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is moved. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) is impossible, and improper act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the main body frame 3 is unlocked properly, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first engagement prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The rotation starts in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement projection 1017, the tip of the first engagement projection 1017 is engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the entirety of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, so that the locked state between the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

  When the main frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in contact with the regulating protrusion 1031. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 abut from the front, and finally reach the state shown in FIG. 86 (A). Thus, the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. Also, in the present embodiment, the first fraud preventing member 1023 and the second fraud preventing member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an improper act, in this embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in are closed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. In this state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 is pulled down, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 are pulled down. As a result, the intrusion of the fraudulent equipment into the closed space is prevented, so that the fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment includes the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device integrated into the conventional L-shaped base. The mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for slidably mounting the body frame sliding rod 1050 and operating the lock device 1000 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is enlarged, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed firmly.

  Further, since the U-shaped base 1001 is mounted so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, the inside of the lock device 1000 when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the same manner, are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame provided therein.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three places on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock holes 621. And the three screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With such a structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the lock device 1000, a screw formed at the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 and a lock formed at the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 and the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008. Although the structure in which the attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is connected to the lock attachment piece 1008. A lock mounting hole to be screwed through may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Also, without fixing the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 with a screw, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000 and the lock mounting portion 625. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly to the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. An L-shape in which the frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side face 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall section 605 with rivets or the like, and the side face 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall section 605 is omitted. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall of the L-shaped substrate (tablet base). A structure may be adopted, and the same operation and effects as those of the above-described lock device 1000 can be obtained.

[5. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, a basic configuration of the gaming board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko gaming machine removed. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in the game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to a pachinko game machine. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel according to an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 89 and the like viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 is a game view of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 94 is a cross-sectional view of a game panel of the game board of FIG. 92 cut in a vertical direction.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is formed to have a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed behind the front component 1110 and defining the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed below the game panel 1150 on the rear lower side, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 for accommodating a main control board 4100 which is mounted on the rear surface of the game area 1100 and controls a game performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100; A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. This game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, which are not shown in FIGS. It is further provided (see FIGS. 95 and 96).

  The basic structure of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and the game board 4 is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 of the game board 4 has a substantially rectangular outer shape that can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner circumference. An outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower left end to the left in the horizontal direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view, passing the upper center in the left and right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 and inside the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, an end (upper end) of the inner rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. And an inner rail 1112 and an inner rail 1113 that are capable of contacting the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 by connecting the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 At the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer opening guide surface 1115, which is lowered rearward, is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112, and closes between the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is rotatable only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position opened in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front and opened to the outer rail 1111. A backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. 87 and the like, the front opening member 1110 is configured such that the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 fires the ball of the main body frame 3. It is located on an extension of the firing rail 660 of the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball hit along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is formed. , And jumps into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow preventing member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the gaming area 1100.

  Also, when a game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 is brought into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by contacting the game ball with the stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. Movement can be prevented. Even if a game ball that has entered (has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. Thus, the backflow of the game ball is prevented by the backflow prevention member 1116.

  In addition, when the game balls hit into the game area 1100 are not received in the starting ports 2101 and 2102, the winning ports 2103, 2104 and 2201, and the like of the front unit 2000 described later, they flow down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the player is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. As a result, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

  The front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding forward from the lower outside of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from below the out-port guiding surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security projection 1117 on the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end projection 183 of the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thereby, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. Is not possible.

  When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 so that the post-security projection 182 of the security cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted. In addition, after the crime prevention, the protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. The inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the post-crime protruding piece 182 also prevent illegal tools such as piano wires that have entered from between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 from reaching the gaming area 1100. You can do it.

  Further, the front component 1110 is disposed at a left end in a front view in a vertical direction and is arranged to be depressed from the front to the rear, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened to the left end, and vertically separated to a right end in a front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side in front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111, is opened downward, is formed in an arc shape on the upper side, and is recessed from the front side, and a front view, Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape and extends upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 when viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 in the front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  In addition, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 allows the game board fixing tool 690 supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 to be viewed from the front in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It has become. The ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used to hold the game board 4 with the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In this state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122, 1152.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through-hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at the lower side of the through-hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. It has a fastening portion 1124 having a small thickness, and a certificate sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in a front view for attaching a certificate for certification confirmation. The fastening portion 1124 of the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, but when the present game board is attached to a conventional body frame, a predetermined fastening band is inserted into a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by being wound around and fastened to each other, and illegal removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later, which is located outside the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right in front view. The front component 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from both left and right lower ends of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160. A predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By attaching, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. The positioning projection 1127 is fitted to an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150, so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wooden board such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 includes an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guide surface 1115 of the front component 1110 at a lower portion substantially at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally long front-rear side at the lower left side in the front view. And a ball passage notch 1152 which is opened downward and has the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates the lower right corner in front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  In the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower portion, and positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 to be formed and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed forward by a predetermined amount from the rear surface on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and has a lower end side opened downward (see FIG. 90). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and cut out so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component 1110, and although not shown, a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. Inside, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. The game panel 1150 is formed such that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100. When the game panel 1150 is assembled to the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 of the front component 1110. The game ball guided backward by the provided out port guiding surface 1115 enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate vertically in the front end of the bottom wall substantially at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the top surface of the bottom wall has an out-ball. The game balls are formed so as to become lower toward the discharge portion 1161, and are discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160. Is discharged downward from the out-ball discharge section 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 are all discharged downward through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1150, and then fit with the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In a state where the board holder 1160 is fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162, so that the board holder 1160 is attached to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 90, the board holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 to which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side at the rear left end of the rear surface of the rear wall portion, and a fixing portion. A locking portion 1164 that is disposed to face the 1163 and is capable of locking the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from behind. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[5-4. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 having an open rear side, and a thin horizontally long box shape having a front side opened by covering the rear face of the board base 1171 and fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. The board cover 1172 includes a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1172. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 in the rear view and fits into the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and the right end of the board cover 1172 in the rear view. And an elastic fixing piece that projects rearward and is elastically engaged with the engaging portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 90 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the upper and lower sides of the elastic fixing piece 1175, two at the right end in rear view to seal the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) stuck over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the hermetic seal And a protective cover 1177. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Have been. In order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, the main control board box 1170 needs to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking, so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. This makes it possible to visually and externally determine whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened.

  In the present embodiment, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 has a seal sealed over the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the seal is cut or peeled off. It is necessary that the seal be left open and closed in this hermetic seal. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such misconduct.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100e and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. In addition, by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the hermetic seal are skillfully worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by other than visual inspection, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 with high security performance can be checked. You can do it.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position on the front component 1110, and a display portion 1181 arranged on the front surface of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side, and a display portion of the front component 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has one LED for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. Upper special symbol storage display for displaying the number of game balls to be accepted to the upper starting port 2101, comprising a game state indicator 1183 comprising a game state indicator 1183 and two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game state indicator 1183. Device 1184 and one 7-segment LED arranged on the right side of the upper special symbol storage display 1184 for displaying the first special lottery result selected by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101 as the first special symbol. The upper special symbol display 1185 which is composed of: The lower special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the performed second special lottery result as the second special symbol, and two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the lower special symbol indicator 1186 And a lower special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves relating to acceptance of game balls into the lower starting port 2102.

  In addition, the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the game balls through the gate portion 2350 arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186. And a normal symbol storage display 1188 composed of four LEDs for performing the game, and a normal lottery result, which is arranged below the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2350, is displayed as a normal symbol. Symbol display 1189 composed of one LED and a large winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is arranged along the diagonally upper right side of the normal symbol memory display 1188 and the result is "big hit". And a round indicator 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing operation.

  The game state display 1183 in the function display unit 1180 is a red / green / orange color and a full-color LED whose emission color can be changed. Various game states (for example, a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probable change time reduction state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  In addition, when the upper special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol variably on the upper special symbol display 1185, when a game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101, The number of changes (the number of storages) of the first special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The upper special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on / off. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b Are turned on together, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b flashes when the number of reservations is three, and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned on. It is blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  Also, the lower special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the lower special symbol display 1186 is not able to variably display the second special symbol, when a game ball is received in the lower starting port 2102, This is to display the number of reserves (the number of storages) of the second special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored). The lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b. The second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on / off. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, When the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a flashes and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is lit when the number of reservations is three, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery selected by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. The special lottery result is displayed. The 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the light-emitting pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED are displayed. The second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

  The ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a full-color LED capable of changing its emission color in red, green, and orange, and is a combination of the emission color that emits light and lighting / flashing. Accordingly, it is possible to display a normal lottery result which is selected by a game ball passing through the gate unit 2350. The display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is, like the special symbol, displayed for a predetermined period of time and then stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  Also, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored (stored) ordinary symbols is displayed. The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, the number of reserved ordinary symbols can be displayed. In this embodiment, up to four variable displays of the ordinary symbols are reserved (stored).

  Further, the round display 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a composed of a predetermined LED and a 15-round display lamp 1190b. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the function display unit 1180 can be visually recognized by the player through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the game status display 1183, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the lower special symbol memory display 1187, the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 of the function display unit 1180, The ordinary symbol display 1189 and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 97). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, so that the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, and the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost. Even if the game board 4 which is embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and is capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. A player or a clerk of a game hall is made to recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. It has to be able to bet.

[5-6. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 different from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component 1110, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 92 to 94 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is a plate-like plate having a thickness smaller than that of the game panel 1150 described above and capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110 from the outer shape of the front component 1110. It also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

  The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, a methacrylic resin, or a glass or a metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is smaller than the thickness of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if an unillustrated nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has a thickness (8 to 10 mm). In this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1212 which are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend vertically. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is provided with a stepped engagement step 1213 with a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 of the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wood board (in the present embodiment, (Approximately 20 mm). The panel holder 1220 holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is concave from the front side to the rear side. The inside of the holding step 1221 is substantially the same size as the game area 1100. And a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1210. And are substantially flush with each other. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface having a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. Note that the clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step 1221, and is arranged from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 which engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends forward from the front of the holding step 1221. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 on the lower side of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and is located between the front surface of the holding step 1221 and the panel. In a state where a predetermined gap having a size large enough to allow the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, a predetermined amount is extended upward (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, panel holder 1220 and front component 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in the form of being recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface side. ing. Due to the mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth is about 2.5 mm (in the present embodiment, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 96) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment supporting portion 1227. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3001a can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be mounted on the main body frame. 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1) can be securely installed in the gaming board holding opening 601.

  Further, in the panel holder 1220, as shown, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodation recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is provided with a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure) that projects forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a front flange shape in the back box 3001). Are omitted)). In the present embodiment, the positioning hole 1229 is a substantially rectangular (square hole) blind hole in rear view.

  It should be noted that, for the mounting hole 1228, a hole having a large diameter and a hole having a small diameter are mixed, and a mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is selected according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 92, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed on the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is substantially flat, the rear surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is substantially flat, and the game ball fired from the hitting ball firing device 650. Is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For example, a box-shaped rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 has a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning device such as an obstacle nail implantation device (not shown) or an assembling jig. The game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail implantation device. It can be set in the state where it was done. In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrating horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in a front view, and downward. And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protruding portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner in the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 93) which is recessed forward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and has a lower end side opened downward. A notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and cut out from the right end in front view so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). The positioning protrusion 607 provided is fitted, and the outboard discharge groove 1235 is fitted to the positioning protrusion 607, so that the game board 4 relatively moves in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step 1213 are engaged. By the combination, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel board 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail implantation apparatus while holding the panel plate 1210 in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation apparatus, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost for implanting the obstacle nail. You can do it.

  Although not shown, the game panel 1200 is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210, The front unit 2000 is attached. Further, a rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, since only the front unit is supported on the thin panel plate 1210, the panel plate 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and to provide a transparent panel. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen from the player through the board 1210 can be embodied, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 in which the position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, and the like changes depending on the type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used as a replacement part. At the same time, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the gaming board 4 capable of supporting various models can be provided only by replacing the panel plate 1210 alone. .

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if the positions are different. It has become.

[5-7. Detailed configuration of gaming board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95 is a detailed front view of the game board. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board shown in FIG.

  The gaming board 4 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the outer periphery of a gaming area 1100 into which a game ball as a game medium is driven by a player operating the handle device 500. And a frame-shaped front component 1110 that defines the front panel 1110 at a lower right corner of the front component 1110 when viewed from the front of the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner. The function display unit 1180 disposed and a plurality of openings 1158 which are attached to the rear side of the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 96) and a front unit 2 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side. 00, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1150, the.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000. A panel lens member 2500 inserted from the side, a liquid crystal display device which is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and which can display a predetermined effect image which can be visually recognized from the player side according to the game state, The game apparatus includes a substrate holder 1160 attached to a lower portion of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover a lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main control substrate box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

[5-7-1. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 includes an attacker unit 2100 disposed above the out port 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front of the game panel 1150, and a game area on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the outer periphery of the game panel 1150 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150; a frame-shaped center role 2300 arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150; It has.

  The table unit 2000 is inserted from the front into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. A portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is located in the game area 1100. Thereby, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nails implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 can prevent the movement of the game ball. That is, it is possible to make a change. Further, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-7-1a. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) through which game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. The upper starting port 2101 disposed substantially at the center of the lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 disposed below the lower starting port 2102. Also has a large winning opening 2103 in a rectangular shape greatly extending in the left-right direction, and a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly above and below the left and right sides of the winning opening 2103. The game balls received in the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the special winning port 2103, and the general winning port 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open at the upper side, so that game balls can be always received (winning). On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by a starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 97) is disposed between the lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101 and the upper starting port 2101. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stand substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive a game ball into the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received in the lower starting port 2102. That is, the lower starting port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2106. Note that the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2105 based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate unit 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

  The large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close its opening. The opening / closing member 2107 is rotatably supported at the lower side. When the opening / closing member 2107 is substantially vertical, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side moves forward. , The large winning opening 2103 is opened to be able to receive a game ball. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the special winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal game state, and a special lottery is performed when a game ball is received (starts winning) in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. In response to the lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 97).

  Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is open upward as shown in the figure, so that game balls can be always received (winning).

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower starting port 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the special winning port 2103. 2110, and the game balls detected by the lower starting port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 are discharged onto the bottom wall of the substrate holder 1160. Note that an upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received by the upper starting port 2101 and a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received by the general winning port 2104 are provided in a back unit 3000 described later. ing.

[5-7-1b. Side winning opening material]
The side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is located at an opening 1158 formed at the lower left portion from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1150 and to the left of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is positioned along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to line up with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in the front view of the attacker unit 2100. There are two general winning openings 2201 facing each other. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can be always received (winning), and the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the side winning opening member 2200 has a left end located at an upper left end thereof at a position substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and lower side of the two general winning openings 2201, and are located at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). (A 2103 side), and a second shelf portion 2203 which is lowered toward the center of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202. You can do it.

  Note that the two general winning openings 2201 are disposed on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game ball is brought to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility that a prize will be awarded to the general prize port 2201. Also, a third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center of the game area 1100 is provided above the two general winning openings 2201.

  The side winning opening member 2200 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and although not shown in detail, a side winning opening decorative board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration board 3014 in the back unit 3000 described later is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200. Are light emitting decorations.

[5-7-1c. Center character]
In addition, the center role 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 which is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150 It is fixed to the front surface, as shown, is formed in a frame shape with a size occupying most of the game area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view is outside the game ball between the outer periphery of the game area 1100 and the outside. It is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the diameter is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is on a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 1100. Is formed.

  The center role 2300 is an upper shelf 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left from the position slightly closer to the right and left in the center in the left and right direction on the outer peripheral surface above the front wall located at the front of the game panel 1150. When the game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center role 2300 and to the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (entered) flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at a stretch through the right side of the center role item 2300. That is, when the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center role 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the driving strength of the game ball is increased. The length of the game can be adjusted as appropriate, and a sense of tension can be maintained to prevent the game from becoming a loose game.

  In addition, the center role item 2300 enters the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 is allowed to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp exit (not shown) for discharging game balls into the frame, and a center ball for discharging the game balls discharged from the warp outlet into the game area 1100 on the upper side of the attacker unit 2100 after rolling left and right. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side of the frame in the frame 2300.

  Although a detailed illustration is omitted, the stage 2310 of the center role 2300 is provided with a first stage to which the game ball discharged from the warp exit is supplied, and a game ball disposed in front of the first stage and arranged from the first stage. A second stage that is supplied and capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. This stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction becomes lower. Further, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed at a rear side of the first stage substantially at the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 has a chance at the lowermost front surface of the center role 2300. It is configured to be discharged from the exit 2314 into the game area 1100. The chance exit 2314 is disposed immediately above the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 as shown in the figure, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is received by the upper starting port 2101 with a high probability (winning). To).

  Note that the stage 2310 in the center role item 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, a decorative body disposed below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side. Has become.

  In addition, the center accessory 2300 has a transparent outer side extending from the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall located on the front side of the game panel 1150 above the warp entrance 2302 so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112 in the left direction. An arch 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150 through which game balls can pass. Thus, a game ball driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left side of the center role 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows downstream through the rear side of the arch portion 2315.

  Further, the center role item 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting the passage of a game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance which is located above the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion and through which game balls flowing down the game area 1100 can enter, and a game ball entering the gate entrance. A gate switch 2352 that performs the game and a gate exit that discharges the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although not shown in detail, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is connected to the arch. The part 2315 is made to look as if diving.

[5-7-2. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 of the gaming board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 penetrates in the front-rear direction in a circular or X shape at a position outside the opening 1158 where the center role 2300 is inserted in the gaming area 1100 in the gaming panel 1150. The light emitting decoration holes formed so as to emit light are decorated. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light-emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of panels disposed on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510. An upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center role 2300, and a rear panel lens 2520 disposed behind the lower panel lens 2520. A lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 protrude forward from the plate-shaped lens base, and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides having substantially the same shape as the light-emitting decoration hole to be inserted. It has a part. When the insertion light guide 2502 is inserted into the light-emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, its tip is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. The game balls are not affected as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can light and decorate an area where a game ball flows down using an opaque game panel 1150 such as veneer plywood by appropriately emitting LEDs on the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate. In addition, it is possible to show the decoration of the game panel 1150, which has never been seen before, to the player, and to make the pachinko gaming machine 1 stand out so as to be distinguished from other pachinko gaming machines.

[5-7-3. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 of the game board 4 of the present embodiment is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance as shown in the drawing. A back box 3001, an upper unit 3002 arranged above the liquid crystal display 1900 in the back box 3001, a character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display 1900 in the back box 3001, and a back box 3001. And a gear decoration unit 3500 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A game ball attached to the side lamp decoration board 3014 and the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game received in the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a right that guides the game ball, which is disposed on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and is received by the upper starting port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 on the right of the attacker unit 2100, downward. And a guide member 3018.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 has a horizontally-long rectangular lamp driving board box which is disposed at the lower rear side of the back box 3001 and accommodates a lamp driving board 4170 (see FIG. 99). A panel relay terminal plate 4161 (see FIG. 97) fixed to the rear side of the lamp driving board box 3001 and disposed on the left side when viewed from the rear of the lamp driving board box, and a horizontal rectangular upper resistor disposed at the rear upper part of the back box 3001 It further includes a substrate and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 to detachably hold the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 formed into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. In addition, the back unit 3000 is configured such that the units 3100, 3400, and 3500 move independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state, and the movement causes the player to change the game state. And the arrival of a chance can be suggested, and the player can be entertained.

[5-7-3a. Back box]
The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape whose front side is open, and has a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end. The game panel 1150 is provided via the fixing portions 3001a. It is designed to be fixed to the rear side. The back box 3001 has a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the rear wall, through which the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed from the player side. Further, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, and 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  Further, although not shown, the back box 3001 inserts and locks one of the fixing pieces 1902 (the right side in the rear view) that protrudes outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the right of the opening in the rear view. In addition to the supporting portion, a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening when viewed from the rear, and the lock member supports the other fixing piece 1902 (the left side when viewed from the rear) of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that a liquid crystal display is provided. The device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-7-3b. Guide member]
The left guiding member 3016 in the back unit 3000 guides the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths. Each of the channels is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper starting port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 on the right side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The flow path corresponding to the upper starting port 2101 is provided with an upper starting port switch 3022, and the flow path corresponding to the right general winning port 2104 is provided with a general winning port switch 3020. The right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall of the substrate holder 1160, and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 to below the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-7-3c. Upper unit]
The upper unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is formed to be horizontally long as a whole, and is attached and fixed inside the back box 3001 above the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900. The upper unit 3100 is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and has a circular decorative body unit 3200 that is circular in front view. 3250, a swinging decorative body unit 3300 arranged substantially at the center in the left-right direction behind the elevating mechanism 3250, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotating decorative body unit 3200 of the upper unit 3100 is moved up and down by an elevating mechanism 3250 between a raised position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowered position located substantially at the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. You can do it. In this rotating decorative body unit 3200, a rotating decorative body formed in a shuriken shape arranged on the front surface rotates, and the rotating radius of the rotating decorative body increases due to centrifugal force due to the rotation. It has become.

  In this rotary decorative body unit 3200, not only the rotary decorative body is rotated at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the rotational radius of the entire rotary decorative body is enlarged and the appearance is greatly changed. That can have a strong impact on the player, keep the player from having fun and reduce the interest in the game, and strongly attract the player's interest Thus, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko gaming machine which is greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

  Further, the swing decorative body unit 3300 of the upper unit 3100 includes swing decorative bodies arranged on the left and right sides on the rear side thereof so as to be adjacent to the rotary decorative body unit 3200 located at the ascending position, and according to the game state. The left and right swing decorations can be simultaneously swung in the left and right directions. Further, the movable ceiling unit 3350 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with a plate-shaped ceiling decorative body extending horizontally at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling decorative body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as a center, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decorative body is turned in a downward direction according to a game state. Has become.

[5-7-3d. Character unit]
As shown, the character unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 has a ninja-shaped and three-dimensionally shaped character body, and the character body moves from the rightmost position to the center according to the playing state. To the left or right. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, it rotates by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

  In addition, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis whose head extends in the left-right direction, and the right arm reciprocates around an axis extending in the vertical direction. Can be done. Thus, by reciprocating the head, a motion as if the character is nodding can be performed. In addition, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to perform an operation as if the character is throwing a shuriken.

[5-7-3e. Gear decoration unit]
The gear decoration body unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a plurality of gear-shaped gear decoration bodies rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and arranged in a vertical direction, and each gear decoration according to a game state. The body rotates all at once.

[5-7-4. Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, so that a predetermined effect image can be displayed according to the game state. I have. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 projecting outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing piece 1902.

  Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral board box that houses a peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97. FIG. 99 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. 97 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to and from a connection terminal board for a game ball or the like that relays an electrical connection with the display board. FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97, and FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU.

  As shown in FIG. 97, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 4100 will be described, and then the payout control board 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 97, a main control board 4100a for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100c to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100d and a RAM clear switch 4100e for completely erasing information stored in a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as a "main control built-in ROM") and a main control built-in RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), and a countermeasure to prevent fraud. Functions are also built-in. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM has a unique code (a code having only one code in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. ) Are stored in advance. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten by using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  An upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, a lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102, and a general winning port 2104 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball is first input to the main control input circuit 4100c, and is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b. In addition, as shown in FIG. 95, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2201, and a ball entering the large winning opening 2103. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 for detecting a game ball and the magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the main control input circuit 4100c via the relay terminal board 4161, and is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d based on these detection signals, and thereby the starting port solenoid 2105 and the attacker via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2108, an upper special symbol display 1185, a lower special symbol indicator 1186, and an upper special symbol memory are transmitted from the main control I / O port 4100b to the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191. A drive signal is output to the display 1184, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the ordinary symbol display 1189, the ordinary symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110. As the winning opening switches 3020, 3020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate section 2350, so that the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. The detection of game balls also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball enters frequently, so that the count switch 2110 frequently detects the game ball. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where the game balls do not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used.

  The main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110 in a serial manner, and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Etc. in a serial format. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to control of gaming effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140. Here, a main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in a serial manner will be described. The main control MPU 4100a mainly includes a main control CPU core 4100aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, connects the bus 4100ah. The circuit is connected through the circuit (see FIG. 105). The main serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, etc. 105). When the command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb, the main control CPU core 4100aa outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. BC0 (see FIG. 102). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100e is also output to the payout control board 4110.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 98, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like performs the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to payout, the firing control by the firing solenoid 654, and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 585. FIG. 66 shows a launch control unit 4130 that performs control, an error LED display 860c that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 860c, and FIG. And a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the award ball tank 720, the tank rail 731 and the award ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to start a ball removal operation. .

[6-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 98, a payout control unit 4120a that performs various controls related to payout is a payout control MPU 4120a that is a microprocessor including a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. And an external watchdog timer 4120c (hereinafter referred to as "external WDT 4120c") for monitoring whether or not the payout control I / O port 4120b as an I / O device and the payout control MPU 4120a are operating normally. ), A payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, a payout control input circuit 4120e to which detection signals from various detection switches for payout are inputted, and a CR unit 6. CR unit input / output for exchanging various signals It includes a road 4120F, a. The payout control MPU 4120a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), as well as to prevent fraud. Functions are built in.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4120b, and clears the RAM from the main control board 4100. An operation signal (detection signal) of the switch 4100e is input via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  70, a ball out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in a supply path 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and flowing down in the prize ball path 741c formed in the base unit 741. A detection signal from the counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball to be played is first input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the board 754 inside the winning ball case of the winning ball device 740, and paid out via the payout control I / O port 4120b. It is input to the control MPU 4120a. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first supplied to the rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the substrate 754 in the prize ball case. And is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first output from the payout control input circuit 4120e. To the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The detection signal from the full tank switch 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is full of the stored game balls is first processed by the handle relay terminal plate 192 and It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball case substrate 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal for displaying on the display 860c is output to the error LED display 860c via the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port. The main control board 4100 is transmitted to the main control board 4100 via the serial system 4120b, or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4120b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 860c is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860c. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection failure” (specifically, the main control board 4100 Is notified that the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740). (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout rotator 74 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. And that the payout rotator 748 is difficult to rotate due to the engagement of the game ball with the game ball near its entrance), and when the number “3” is displayed, it is a “counter switch error” (specifically, Indicates that a failure has occurred in the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error” (specifically, The number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, when the full switch 550 is pressed). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is informed that the game balls are full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” ( (That the electrical connection has been cut off from any one of the output control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "stocking" (specifically, Indicates that the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, a frequency display plate 365, a main door relay terminal plate 880, and a lending device connection terminal plate for game balls, etc. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball renting device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. The payout control I / O port 4120b receives the data through the input / output circuit 4120f and inputs the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of the lent game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to rent the game balls or the like. The signal is output to the device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c.

[6-2-2. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 98, the firing control unit 4130 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585 includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing. 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4130c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, A firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4130c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the transmitting circuit 4130b so that 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 1100 per minute and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. At the same time, a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid driving circuit 4130e.

  A touch switch 516 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the front of the rotary handle body 506, and a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether to forcefully stop launching a game ball by a player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4130a via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4130c. When the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit 4130a as a CR connection signal and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4130c. I have. The signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of the game ball to hit the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 is first transmitted to the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d via the controller.

  Based on the signal from the potentiometer 512, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4130d outputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506. The input is output to the firing solenoid 654 in response to the input. On the other hand, when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4130e applies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay terminal plate 192. By outputting the ball, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is output. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. As described above, while the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 102) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. . The payout control MPU 4120a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even in the power-off process even when the power is turned off by the capacitor BC1. When the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[6-2-3. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6, and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 99, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the substrates is also relayed. Between the board between the payout control board 4110 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the CR unit 6 and the board such as the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and between the frequency display plate 365 and the game ball rental device connection terminal. The board and the board 869 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). In addition, AC 24 V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter, referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown), together with the ground LG. It is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frequency display board 365 via the game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 869.

  On the frequency display plate 365, a ball lending switch 365a, which is a push button switch, is mounted on a part surface thereof corresponding to the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining frequency display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display section 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

  The ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The ball lending switch 365a is turned on (ON) when the ball lending button 361 is pressed, and the ball lending operation signal TDS is input to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. It has become so. The return switch 365b is turned on (ON) when the return button 362 is pressed, so that the return operation signal RES is input to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. Has become.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a line. Of these three digit segment indicators, one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven, so-called dynamic lighting system is used for three digits. The segment display is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The residual number display 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display of the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be lit and displayed are input from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. In accordance with the inputted digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, the one-digit segment display emits light sequentially, and the contents of the three-digit segment display emitted by the light emission remain. It can be visually recognized through the display unit 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball rental state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be viewed through the remaining lending display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are inputted to the remaining frequency indicator 365c through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  When the ball lending button 361 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the CR unit 6 generates a BRDY lending request signal BRDY. The output is provided to a payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via a game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, to a lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. Through the card, PRDY, which is a signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental device connecting terminal board such as a game ball. 869 to output to the CR unit 6. In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, a single payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession. When 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  When the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869, the CR unit 6 discharges the prepaid card from the insertion slot (not shown). And return it. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball rental button 361 being pressed.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. And a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 for controlling sound such as music and sound effects flowing from speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, calendar information for specifying the date, and time for specifying the hour, minute, and second. A real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds information and music and sound effects flowing from speakers 821 provided on the body frame 3 and speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. And the like by adjusting the volume of the knob by rotating the knob.

[6-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 99, a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and will be described later. Various kinds of information (for example, defining a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900) that continues over the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores schedule data to be performed and information for managing schedule data that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc.) and various information that continues over the day (for example, a jackpot game state has occurred. Information and special effects files for managing the history Control SRAM 4150d for storing information for managing the peripherals, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally (hereinafter, “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”). .) Are provided. The peripheral control RAM 4150c cannot retain the stored contents only for the time when the power is restored immediately after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-term power interruption occurs). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown, hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board 851. Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 851, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Can no longer keep and lose its contents. The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a runs out of control. When the timer expires, a reset is performed by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When outputting the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, based on the various commands, each decoration board of the game board 4 The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the game device is transmitted from the lamp driving board serial I / O port to the lamp driving board 4170, The game board side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the board 4 is transmitted from the motor drive board serial I / O port to the motor drive board 4180. Door-side motor drive data for transmitting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 or the like. Frame decoration drive amplifier board Transmit from the motor serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like, from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door The signal is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided on the operation unit 400 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the press detection switch 432c for detection is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted to the door-side serial transmission circuit. Is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868.

  Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting an original position, a movable position, and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, The serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[6-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 101, the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I. / Peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, a peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and a peripheral control various parallel I. / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and DMA0 -It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and a built-in peripheral control WDT 4150af built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads from and writes to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The input / output devices such as the port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak are independent of each other without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to perform data transfer, storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are connected via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h. While reading and writing, peripheral control is performed on input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. Reading and writing are performed via the bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, the hardware reset is performed. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will take. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count, and therefore does not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal, a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, etc., and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, the movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output, and an upper decoration on the door frame 5 is provided. For example, a lighting signal of the LED 286b mounted on the upper decorative board 286 of the unit 280 is output. As described above, the LED 286b is a high-brightness white LED, and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are electrically connected directly. As a result, noise countermeasures can be taken with respect to the lighting control of the LED 286b which is meaningful in the game. Note that the lighting control of the LED 286b is executed in a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs except the LED 286b are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by turning the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the 1024 stage values are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 , 262 from which music and sound effects are played. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a content related to a game effect. (For example, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the player is informed that there is a high possibility of transition to a game state advantageous to the player, etc.). Sound also flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound do not depend at all on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. It has a flowing mechanism, and adjusts the volume from mute to the maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) by a program. It has to be able to bet. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 are provided. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects from 130, 222, and 262 is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (in this embodiment, , Maximum volume). Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraud due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while That the screen played on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful in addition to the music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, or that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous gaming state for the player. You can also.

[6-3-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission mode of various LEDs, and sound generation schedule for generating music and sound effects. There are data and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in a time-series manner, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a liquid crystal and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source, a track number for designating a track into which sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, and the various control programs are stored in various control program copy areas 4150cd of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to be described later when the power is turned on. Some are copied and read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or may be read when various types of control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are powered on. In some cases, the copied contents are read out.

  Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b includes, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900. ing. This luminance correction program is for correcting a decrease in luminance due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the power of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the 4165, and the acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. And the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, for example, based on the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time. If six months have already passed since the date and time when the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, 80% of luminance is added to the 75% by 5% which is the acquired correction information. In this way, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and lit based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information, and 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. In this case, when the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of the 75% is further increased by 10%, which is the correction information acquired, to 85%. To light up.

[6-3-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
The peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150ca for exclusively storing, among various information updated by executing various control programs, a backup target. A backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy areas 4150cd for exclusively storing the copied data, and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. A control data copy area 4150ce for storing information, and a backup non-management work area 4150cf for exclusively storing information which is not to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. Is provided. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including a momentary power failure or a power recovery due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and is cleared to zero. Regarding the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 118) starts the RAM clear effect. When the instruction is to instruct the start of each state effect (for example, to instruct the start of an effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated), the state is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. “(1fr)” indicates a state in which the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source can output screen data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900 and receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as described later. Since the V blank signal notifying the existence is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, every one frame (1 frame). However, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (the same meaning is applied to the effect information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1fr) described later). "(1ms)" indicates that a 1ms timer interrupt has occurred, as described later. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, it is appended to “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” (effect information (1 ms), The effect backup information (1 ms) described later is used in the same meaning.)

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad has an RTC control unit 4165 (RTC 41654a described later). Various information acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It has been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is stored. The motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. An operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca, which is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies is set. Includes various kinds of information (for example, the operation unit 400 receives the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405) based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided are set.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral area is set. When the control unit regular processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150cb, two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has two pairs, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as effect backup information (1 ms), each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-3-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command (see FIG. 118) from the main control board 4100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including a momentary power failure or a power recovery due to a power failure). Even in the case of instructing the start of the clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated), the zero clear is performed. Not done. This point is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the first backup area 4150cb, and the second backup area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, .) While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) that is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target for various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and the one pair as one page. The production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the production backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) with peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

[6-3-2. LCD and sound control unit]
A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 includes: As shown in FIG. 100, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and a sound source built-in VDP ( A video display processor 4160a; a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900; Audio data transmission I for transmitting sound effects and the like as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 It includes a 4160c, a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. In accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, the next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to incorporate the sound source. Output to the VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Then, 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data storage is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source is generated. Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

[6-3-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data. Also, a VRAM for generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is built in (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source performs liquid crystal and Character data is extracted from the sound control ROM 4160b, sprite data is created, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is generated in the built-in VRAM, and the generated drawing data is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Output to the device 1900. That is, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” is data for generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the built-in VRAM. .

  Also, when the rendering data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source generates a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received. Output to MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷). 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. This “frame buffer method” means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) and held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Also, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a stores sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. By extracting sound and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number. The music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speakers 821 provided on the frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated. Sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, and sound data and the sound volume of a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or misconduct with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is incorporated. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is determined by operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 during a jackpot game state described later (for example, 1 round to 15 rounds as the jackpot game state). If a total of 15 rounds are set, the adjustment can be made within a period in which each round from 1 round to 15 rounds is being digested). The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized to audio data as audio data. The data is output to the transmission IC 4160c. In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, and the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and The volume flowing from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume control volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually changed to the speaker 821 and the door provided on the main body frame 3. The volume is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Adjust the sound data of the notification sound embedded in the track to be used and the volume of the notification sound embedded in the track to be used And the maximum volume without depending on the volume control based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a set as the volume control value, and synthesizes the volume of the synthesized notification sound into the main frame. 3 is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speakers 821 provided in the speaker frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. . Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal action on the pachinko gaming machine 1 occur. Briefly explain the control to play the notification sound to notify the hall clerk, etc. First, forcibly set the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated to mute, and set the track in which the production sound is incorporated. Sound data, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume. The sound volume of the production sound and the sound volume of the notification sound are compared with the sound volume actually flowing from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. That was amplified to a master volume value, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in the audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data serialization. That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume actually flows from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the production sound is generated by the sound generation schedule data described above. It is progressing according to. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speakers 821 provided on the body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After the elapse of the period, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute until now is equal to the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The volume value is set again (at this time, by operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400, a period in which the big hit gaming state is generated (for example, a total of 15 rounds from the 1st round to the 15th round as the big hit gaming state) If set, within the period during which each round from round 1 to round 15 is digested) When the sub-volume value of the output sound is adjusted, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the speakers 821 provided on the body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 It is flowing from. As described above, when the production sound is flowing from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs and an illegal operation on the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs. When the notification sound flows to notify the clerk of the hall or the like, the volume of the effect sound is muted, and the notification sound is transmitted from the speakers 821 provided on the main frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. Although the sound has flowed, the silenced production sound is proceeding in accordance with the sound generation schedule data. Therefore, after a predetermined period of time, the notification sound has passed, and the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, When it stops flowing from 222 and 262, the production sound does not start flowing again from where the notification sound started flowing, but a predetermined period has elapsed after the notification sound started flowing. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound to the point.

[6-3-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b store in advance various sound data such as music, sound effects, annunciation sounds, and notification sounds in addition to an extremely large amount of character data.

[6-3-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the differential audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of a differential system between the right and left sides of the board from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, so that a plus signal of left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the plus signal and the noise component on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[6-3-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 100, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around an RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the above-described peripheral control RAM 4150c, and sets the acquired calendar information and time information. The effect based on can be developed in the liquid crystal display device 1900. As such an effect, for example, a screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on December 25, or a screen for executing a new year countdown is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on New Year's Eve. Or the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, LED brightness setting information when the LED of the liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED backlight. When the LED of the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a backlight of the LED type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the luminance setting information from the RAM 4165aa with the built-in RTC and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1100, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set liquid crystal display device 1900. And the brightness of the LED that is the backlight. Further, in addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as information on the date, hour, minute, and second when the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is first stored. Input date and time information is also stored. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a cold-cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs ON / OFF control or only ON of the backlight. Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the input date and time information is input as the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. Is set to the production date and time.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes pachinko game information such as luminance setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type and input date and time information. Information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the machine 1 (for example, a probability of a large hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability) can be stored and held.

  Also, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dark for the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the date and time of manufacture. Sometimes it is too much. Thus, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. I have. When the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, When the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the period in which the customer waits and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight can be adjusted to a desired brightness. it can. The adjusted desired brightness is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information. In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program to change the aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. To correct the decrease in luminance due to the The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, and stores the calendar information and the hour, minute, and second for specifying the date. The time information to be specified is acquired to specify the current date and time, and brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED as the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. And the brightness setting information having the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. For example, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, the corresponding date and time from the peripheral control ROM 4150b correspond. When the correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the correction information is obtained for the 75%. The luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on so that the luminance of 80% is further added by 5%. If 12 months have already passed since the power-on date and time, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10 ) Is obtained, and when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% is further added by 10% which is the correction information obtained. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes%. Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the year, month and day and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140, and the current date and time may be specified.

[6-3-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 4140a is used to turn the knob for controlling the volume of music or sound effect from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. Can be adjusted. As described above, the volume of the volume control volume 4140a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 , 262 from which music and sound effects are played. As described above, music and sound effects are played from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1; Inform the user of the contents related to the game effect (for example, direct the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a more powerful one, or announce that there is a high possibility that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous game state for the player, etc.). ) Also flows from the speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are used for adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on it at all, and the volume from mute to the maximum volume is controlled by the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) by a program. So that the it can be adjusted to your. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 are provided. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects from 130, 222, and 262 is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (in this embodiment, , Maximum volume). Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the misconduct of the player by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while That the screen played on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful in addition to the music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, or that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous gaming state for the player. You can also.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. A period in which the jackpot gaming state is generated by operating the dial operation unit 401 (for example, when a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds is set as the jackpot gaming state, 1 round to 15 rounds) The sub-volume value of the produced sound can be adjusted within the period during which each round is completed. In the present embodiment, music is played from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 during execution of the big hit game state. A player who feels uncomfortable can adjust the volume to a small level to comfortably digest the big hit game state, and a player who wants to digest the big hit game state with a powerful volume can adjust the volume large to comfortably digest the big hit game state You can do it. The sub-volume value of the effect sound adjusted in the big hit game state is such that after the big hit game state is consumed, the sub-volume value is maintained and the effect proceeds. The sub-volume value of the production sound is the above-mentioned volume as a default value (initial value) during a period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, is in a customer waiting state, and a demonstration is being performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900. The knob of the adjustment volume 4140a is rotated to set the adjusted substrate volume. Here, a brief description will be given of a program that can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 during the period in which the big hit gaming state occurs. In this program, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and converts the converted value to The value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the predetermined volume is adjusted according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting the value. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to keep the main frame 3 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the clerk of the hall can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, during the period in which the jackpot gaming state occurs (for example, when a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds is set as the jackpot gaming state, each round from 1 round to 15 rounds is digested. During this period, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400. Accordingly, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult for the clerk of the hall to hear the music and the sound effect because the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is small, the operation unit 400 is not used. By operating the dial operation unit 401 to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the clerk of the hall feels the volume adjusted to be loud and uncomfortable with music and sound effects, the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400 is used. By operating 401, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume. Further, in the present embodiment, music is made to flow from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 during execution of the big hit game state. A player who feels unpleasant when resonating can adjust the volume to a small level to comfortably digest the jackpot game state. It can be digested comfortably.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been playing a game for a predetermined time, enters a customer waiting state and performs a demonstration using the liquid crystal display device 1900, the pachinko gaming machine 1 The sound volume adjusted by the player who has been playing the game while sitting at is canceled, and the sound volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted (that is, the effect sound is produced). The sub-volume value is set as a default value (initial value) to the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a.) As a result, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays a game this time sets a period during which the jackpot gaming state occurs (for example, a total of 15 rounds from the 1st round to the 15th round as the jackpot gaming state is set). In this case, the user can operate the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 to adjust the volume to a desired level within a period in which each round from the first round to the fifteenth round is completed.

[7. Power system]
Next, the electric power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. Although not shown, the grounds of the various substrates and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851.

[7-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to a power cord, and a plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 79 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the power supply board 851 has a full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, a power factor improving circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creating circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creating circuit 851e, a + 12V creating circuit 851f, and + 24V creating. The circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectifier circuit 851a performs full-wave rectification on 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies the rectified power factor to the power factor improving circuit 851b. The power factor improving circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies the DC + 37V to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c removes the input + 37V ripple and smoothes the + 37V to make the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, the + 24V creation circuit 851g, and the payout control board. 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The + 5.2V generation circuit 851d generates DC + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which this +5.2 V is applied and supplied is a +5.2 V power supply line. The + 5.25V generation circuit 851e generates DC + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which the +5.25 V is applied and supplied is a +5.25 V power supply line. The + 12V generation circuit 851f generates DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which the + 12V is applied and supplied is a + 12V power supply line. The + 24V generation circuit 851g generates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which the + 24V is applied and supplied is a + 24V power supply line. The voltages generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, the + 12V generation circuit 851f, and the + 24V generation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and are output by the + 5.25V generation circuit 851e, the + 12V generation circuit 851f, and the + 24V generation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Note that AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is also supplied to a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 via a power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

  Further, the power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. Capacitor BC0 is a backup power supply for a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU 4100a of main control board 4100, and capacitor BC1 is built in payout control MPU 4120a of payout control unit 4120 in payout control board 4110. This is a backup power supply for the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  The + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 as described later. + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and also to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 (hereinafter, referred to as “-terminal of the capacitor BC1”) of the power supply board 851 is grounded, while its plus terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. In other words, the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction by the diode PD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC1, The current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d by the electrical connection method of returning the payout control board 4110 to the payout control board 4110 and the power supply board 851 again. The battery can be charged by applying 2V. Thus, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the stored contents are retained by applying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter, referred to as “−terminal of the capacitor BC0”) is grounded, while its plus terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. In other words, the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC0, The current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected such that + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d returns from the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. Depending on the connection method, +5.2 V is applied and charging can be performed. Thus, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the main control board 4100, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is interrupted by the diode MD0 to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. It has become so.

[7-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the three types of voltages of +5.2 V, +12 V, and +24 V generated by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board is supplied via the payout control board 4110. 4100. The four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board is connected via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. On the other hand, among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. As shown in FIG. 103A, the four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are, among the four types of voltages, + 5.25V, + 12V, and Three kinds of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170, and various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal are output from the lamp driving circuit 4170a to various decorative boards of the game board 4. The four types of voltages are supplied to a drive source drive circuit 4180a of a motor drive board 4180, and drive signals are output from the drive source drive circuit 4180a to an electric drive source such as a motor of the game board 4 and a solenoid. In addition, of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages, +24 V and +37 V, are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a that is subjected to drawing control, and a backlight power supply that is a power supply for a backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. Power is being supplied. On the other hand, the three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. Of these three voltages, + 12V is supplied to a + 9V generation circuit 194a to generate DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 9V"). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 supplies four types of voltages including the three types of voltages and +9 V generated by the +9 V generation circuit 194 a to various types of decorative substrates of the door frame 5.

[7-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. The +5.2 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, a payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors signs of a power failure or an instantaneous blackout at + 12V and + 24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure notice when detecting the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100, and through the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIGS. While transmitting to the backlight power supply 1900b, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame 5 through the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. It is transmitted to a decorative substrate or the like.

  Note that, in addition to + 12V and + 24V, which are supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120e of the payout control unit 4120, and + 24V is supplied to the payout control unit 4120. It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4120d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the firing power supply board 831 via the payout control board 4110 without being used at all in the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply board 831 generates a predetermined voltage described later from the supplied +37 V and supplies the predetermined voltage to the firing solenoid driving circuit 4130d of the firing control unit 4130.

  Thus, by providing the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b on the payout control board 4110 on the main body frame 3 side, there is no need to mount the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b every time the game board 4 is manufactured. It can contribute to reduction.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the reason why the payout control board 4110 is provided with the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be briefly described. + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 as described above. In other words, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 provided on the main body frame 3 side have the closest relationship as the transmission path to the main control board 4100 provided on the game board 4 side. It is supplied via a payout control board 4110 provided on the third side. As a result, compared to the case where a power failure monitoring circuit is provided on the power supply board 851, the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure can be monitored in a closer relationship to the main control board 4100 as a transmission path. By making the transmission path for transmitting the advance notice signal to the main control board 4100 short, it is possible to contribute to speeding up the timing at which the main control board 4100 starts backup of important game information. Further, the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line is monitored by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared to the case, it is possible to more accurately grasp a sign of a power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure. Also, in recent pachinko machines, by providing a large number of lights on door frames and game boards, etc., glittering and powerful and attractive effects are provided to players, and the number of lights is reduced. It tends to increase. Accordingly, power consumption has been increasing, and opportunities for improving the power supply board have been increasing. On the other hand, the payout control board is a board that exclusively performs a payout operation of game balls and the like, and therefore, there is very little opportunity to recreate the payout unless there is a major system improvement related to payout. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the above-described reason, a configuration in which the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is provided in the power supply board 851 instead of the power supply monitoring board 4110 is employed.

[7-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100g in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100g is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. This +5.2 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 4100c and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and the like.

[7-2-3. Voltage supplied to launch power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (in the present embodiment, capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF)). The DC / DC converter 831a lowers + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create DC + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”), and drives the firing solenoid of the firing control unit 4130 in the payout control board 4110. Circuit 4130d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter, referred to as “− terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded and the plus terminal thereof (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Is electrically connected to the +35 V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged when +35 V output from the DC / DC converter 831a is applied. In the present embodiment, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110. Has become. The detailed description will be described later.

  As described above, + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, while + 5.25V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. I have. +5.2 V and +5.25 V serve as control reference voltages for the respective control boards. When electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via wiring (harness), the total length of the wiring, that is, For the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 having a short power supply path, the voltage drop (voltage drop) associated with the wiring can be estimated to be small, so that +5.2 V is supplied from the power supply board 851. On the other hand, in addition to the peripheral control board 4140 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the total length of the wiring, that is, the power supply path is longer than the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, and also depends on the peripheral control board 4140. The lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the various decorative boards on the door frame side that are subordinate to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194. Since the voltage drop caused by the wiring (voltage drop) can not be ignored, it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 + 5.2V is higher voltages + 5.25V is supplied from the power supply board 851.

[8. Main control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, and FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 4100g shown in FIG. 102 will be described, followed by a power supply, a main control system reset IC, a main control crystal oscillator, a main control input circuit, and a main control I / O port created by the main control board 4100. Various input / output signals such as 4100b and a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control I / O port 4100b, a main control three-terminal filter MIC0, and a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal as a peripheral circuit. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 MHz in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal is mainly configured.

[8-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 104, the main control filter circuit 4100g mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5.2V is applied to the first terminal from the power supply substrate 851 via the dispensing control substrate 4110 shown in FIG. 102, and the second terminal is grounded to the ground. +5.2 V from which the noise component has been removed is output from the #th terminal. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is smoothed by first removing a ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage) by an electrolytic capacitor MC0 grounded to ground (GND).

  The + 5.2V output from the third terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) which are grounded. Has been The smoothed + 5.2V is a power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, a VDD terminal which is a power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, a VDD terminal which is a power terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a main control I / O port 4100b. Are applied to a VCC terminal or the like, which is a power supply terminal.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 grounded and grounded. The VCC terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is electrically connected to the capacitor MC4 grounded and grounded. And +5.2 V input to the VCC terminal are smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal that is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is grounded, and the GND terminal that is the ground terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is grounded.

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU 4100a, and is also electrically connected to ground and grounded capacitor MC5. ing. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the capacitor MC5, and is also electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Connected. In other words, +5.2 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. It is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. As a result, as described above, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is reduced to the main VBB. The main control MPU 4100a is supplied to the main control MPU 4100a, so that the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate. Is configured so that the stored contents are held by application of the main VBB.

[8-2. Main control system reset IC]
The +5.2 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to a capacitor MC6 which is grounded and grounded, so that the delay time of the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC6. . Specifically, when + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b. The output terminal is an open collector output type and is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor MR1. The voltage raised to the +5.2 V side is smoothed by removing a ripple by a capacitor MC7 grounded and grounded (the capacitor MC7 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O. When the voltage input to the RESETN terminal of the O port 4100b and the voltage input to the power supply terminal are smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN of the main control I / O port 4100b. Input to the terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port The O port 4100b is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground and the grounded capacitor MC8, and the + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground, and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[8-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The + 5.2V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the ground and the capacitor MC9 which is grounded. The + 5.2V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The smoothed +5.2 V is also input to the output terminal A, the terminal B, the terminal C, and the terminal ST in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the output terminal F when +5.2 V is applied to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input thereto. The main control MPU 4100a to which the clock signal has been input outputs a clock signal from its E terminal. The E terminal is electrically connected to a CLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal output from the E terminal. The terminal between the E terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the CLK terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR2. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded, and the D terminal, which outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. ing.

[8-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100c receives the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e and a power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, the circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input and the circuit to which the power failure notice signal is input will be described. .

[8-4-1. Circuit to which a detection signal from the RAM clear switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 104, the third pin as an output pin of the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by a pull-up resistor MR3, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR4. Connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR4 and also to the ground and the resistor MR5 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor MR6 and electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The first and second pins of the RAM clear switch 4100e are grounded, and the fourth pin is electrically connected to the third pin. Thus, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the third and fourth pins are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, while when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the third pin is pulled up. The fourth pin and the fourth pin are electrically connected to the first and second pins, thereby being pulled down to the ground side.

  The circuit composed of the transistor MTR0 and the resistors MR4 and MR5 is a switch circuit. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the voltage pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR3 is the base terminal of the transistor MTR0. , The transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground side, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR6, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. Is done.

[8-4-2. Circuit to which power failure notice signal is input]
As shown in FIG. 104, the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR7, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 via the resistor MR8. Connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is electrically connected to the resistance MR8 and also to the ground and the resistance MR9 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor MR10 and electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b that outputs a power failure warning signal is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded, and is pulled up to the +12 V side by a pull-up resistor MR7. As a result, when the power failure notice signal is not input, the voltage is raised to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR7, while when the power failure warning signal is input, the voltage is lowered to the ground side.

  The circuit composed of the transistor MTR1 and the resistors MR8 and MR9 is a switch circuit. When the power failure notice signal is not input, the voltage pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR7 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1. When the voltage is applied, the transistor MTR1 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is reduced to the ground side, and the power failure notice signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is reduced to the ground side, so that the transistor MTR1 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR10, and the power failure notice signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. Is entered.

  The detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR3, whereas the power failure notice signal is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR7. This is because the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input to the main control board 4100, whereas the power failure notice signal is input via the payout control board 4110. In other words, between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, the control reference voltage of +5.2 V is used in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The signal reliability is increased by using + 12V which is a high voltage. As a result, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the upper starting switch 3022, and the lower starting switch 2109 input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up similarly to the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e. While being pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the resistance, the detection from the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which is input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. The signal is pulled up to the +12 V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the power failure notice signal from the payout control board 4110.

[8-5. Various input / output signals of main control I / O port etc.]
Next, various input / output signals of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control I / O port 4100b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control MPU 4100a via a data bus.

  An RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the main control MPU 4100a receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 as a main serial data reception signal. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the main control MPU 4100a, output the serial data to be transmitted to the payout control board 4110 from the TXA terminal as a main payment serial data transmission signal. The serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 is output as a main circumference serial data transmission signal.

  An input pin PA2 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b is supplied with the above-mentioned main control input from the payout control acknowledgment signal from the payout control board 4110 which informs the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal. For example, the upper starting port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 97 is provided to the input pin of the port set as the input port among the other input pins of the input port PA and the ports PB to PE input through the circuit 4100c. And the like, are input via a main control input circuit 4100c. Various detection signals input to the main control I / O port 4100b are input to the main control MPU 4100a via a data bus.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payment main serial data reception signal from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the main control I / O port 4100b via the data bus. Then, from the output pin of the port set as the output port among the ports PB to PE, for example, a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 97 is transmitted via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d. It outputs the drive signal to various displays such as the upper special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG.

[8-6. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with +12 V and +5.2 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 via the payout control board 4110. The main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 to each other. In order to suppress this, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting the signal using + 12V which is higher than + 5.2V which is the control reference voltage.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control board 4100 mainly includes a pull-up resistor MR20, resistors MR21 and MR22, and a transistor MTR20 as a communication interface circuit. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in the present embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as communication interface circuits. ) Is mainly configured.

  To the anode terminal of the diode MD20 of the main control board 4100, +12 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied via the dispensing control board 4110, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is connected to the electrolytic capacitor whose minus terminal is grounded. It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the MC 20 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when the power from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the electrolytic capacitor MC20 The charged electric charge can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 as +12 V.

  Here, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in the present embodiment) shown in FIG. Since the electric charge is applied as + 5.2V, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 by the applied + 5.2V is at least the main built-in main control MPU 4100a. The transmission of the main serial data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed. As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the influence of the intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V which is higher than + 5.2V which is the control reference voltage. That is, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the main control MPU 4100a can complete transmission of the main serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit, but uses the main serial data as a control reference. Even if a main serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI at + 5.2V which is a voltage is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, a main serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI at + 12V is transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20. Cannot output. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. The main serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit of the main control MPU 4100a can be output from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 as a main serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by + 12V. I have. Thus, the main control serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main control serial data is reliably received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being interrupted. In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. In the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal for outputting the main circumference serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 104 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor MR20, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR21. It is electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistance MR21 and also to the ground and to the grounded resistance MR22. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is reduced to the ground side. The transistor MTR20 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V side from the pull-up resistor MR20, the transistor MTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Will be done. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  To the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140, + 5.2V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the minus terminal. Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal No. 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded, and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC is +5 by a pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. .2V side and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and this signal is used as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal as a serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. To the input terminal. Thus, as described above, for example, when power from the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure, for example. Is designed so that the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5.2V. When +5.2 V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is at least The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a can be transmitted, and the main serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main serial serial The data is reliably received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being interrupted or lost.

  When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is reduced to the ground side and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. As a result, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is raised to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main serial data whose logic becomes HI. While the transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW. If Since the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V side from the pull-up resistor MR20 and the transistor MTR20 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. Therefore, the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW due to the voltage applied to the peripheral control MPU 4150a being lowered to the ground side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of.

  As described above, in this embodiment, + 5.2V supplied to various electronic components via the main control filter circuit unit 4100g, that is, + 5.V, which is a reference control voltage generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851. The + 5.2V power supply line to which 2V is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V applied through the diode M20, that is, + 12V generated by the + 12V generation circuit 851f is applied as the communication control voltage, cause a power failure or momentary power failure. Measures are taken when the reference control voltage and the communication control voltage decrease due to the occurrence. That is, for the main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the plus 5.2 V power supply line and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit unit 4100g as the first auxiliary power supply. The terminal is electrically connected in parallel to the main control filter, which is the first auxiliary power supply, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the reference control voltage applied from the +5.2 V power supply line is reduced. By applying the reference control voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the circuit section 4100g, the state where the reference control voltage is applied can be maintained, and the pull-up resistor MR20 and the resistor MR21 can be maintained. , MR22, and the transistor MTR20, an interface circuit of + 12V +12 V applied to the power supply line is applied as a communication control voltage to the anode terminal of the diode M20, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 as the second auxiliary power supply are electrically connected in parallel. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication control voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD20 decreases, communication from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 as the second auxiliary power supply is performed. By applying the control voltage, the state where the communication control voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 from being broken, and to prevent omission of the command, so that the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  The plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all constituted as main serial data by a pull-up resistor MR20, resistors MR21, MR22, and a transistor MTR20. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is set to 220 μF so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the interface circuit to be performed. Thus, even if a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, all commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are transmitted as peripheral serial data via the interface circuit. Since the transmission to the control board 4140 can be completed, the peripheral control board 4140 can reliably receive the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without cutting off or missing.

[9. Discharge control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 is a circuit diagram illustrating a power failure monitoring circuit, FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit of a payout control unit and the like, FIG. 108 is a circuit diagram illustrating a payout control input circuit, and FIG. FIG. 110 is a circuit diagram showing a firing control input circuit, and FIG. 111 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. is there. First, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be described, followed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a, the circuit of the payout control unit 4120, the circuit of the firing control unit 4130, various input / output signals with the main control board 4100, and the external terminal board 784. The various output signals will be described.

[9-1. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 102, the payout control board 4110 is supplied with + 24V, + 12V, and + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and + 24V and + 12V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b monitors the signs of + 24V and + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and when detecting a power failure or instantaneous power failure indication, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning and outputs the power failure control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. In addition, it outputs to the main control MPU 4100a. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by monitoring of +24 V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and monitoring of +12 V power failure or instantaneous power failure.

[9-1-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 106, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, an open collector output type comparator PIC21, a D type flip-flop PIC22, and a transistor PTR20 (2SC1815 in the present embodiment). I have.

  +5.2 V is applied to the REF terminal as the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal as the cathode terminal of the shunt stabilizing power supply circuit PIC20 via the resistor PR20. Is limited by The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set) serving as a comparison reference voltage of the comparator PIC21. The reference voltage Vref is smoothed by removing a ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage) by a capacitor PC20 grounded and grounded (the capacitor PC20 also serves as a low-pass filter). In addition, the A terminal which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator PIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (PIC21A) is used for comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is connected to the + terminal. The reference voltage Vref is input to the negative terminal. The other one (PIC21B) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is input to the + terminal, and the reference voltage Vref is input to the-terminal. I have. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (PIC23A) is used in the present embodiment. Note that the +5.2 V input to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator PIC21, is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC21 that is grounded. In addition, + 5.2V input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is smoothed by removing a ripple by a capacitor PC22 grounded.

[9-1-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the +24 V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the PIC 21A of the comparator PIC21 comparing the +24 V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 106, the voltage of +24 V is distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors PR21 and PR22, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC23 grounded and grounded, and is input to the + terminal of the PIC 21A. It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR21 and PR22 become a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in the present embodiment) when the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V starts to drop from + 24V. , The monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref. As a result, the logic becomes LOW. However, since the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type as described above, The voltage is pulled up to +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, the logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded and ground, and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 (capacitor) The PC 24 also plays a role as a low-pass filter. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is higher than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure notice signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref. As a result, the logic becomes HI. However, since the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type, the logic is Becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the +24 V monitoring voltage V1 is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure notice signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, to the payout control I / O port 4120b. Is output.

[9-1-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12 V is performed by the PIC 21B of the comparator PIC21 comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 106, the voltage of +12 V is distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors PR24 and PR25, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC25 grounded and grounded, and is input to the + terminal of the PIC 21B. It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR24 and PR25 become a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in the present embodiment) when the voltage starts to fall from + 12V when + 12V fails or momentarily stops. , The monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref. As a result, the logic becomes LOW. However, since the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type as described above, The voltage is pulled up to +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, the logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded and grounded, and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is higher than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure notice signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref. As a result, although the logic becomes HI, the logic is changed because the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type. It becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded and grounded, and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure notice signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, to the payout control I / O port 4120b. Is output.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26 and also to the ground and a resistor PR27 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor MR7 of the main control input circuit 4100c shown in FIG. 104 via a wiring (harness). Thus, the signal output from the 1Q terminal is pulled up to the +12 V side and transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a power failure notice signal. That is, the transistor PTR20 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded. Thus, between the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 and the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4100b, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 and the payout control I / O port 4100b pay out. Since it is mounted on the control board 4110, the power failure notice is given by the power failure notice signal 1 which is an ON / OFF signal using + 5.2V as the control reference voltage, whereas the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) for electrically connecting the substrates, the ON / OFF using + 12V which is higher than the control reference voltage + 5.2V A power failure notice is given by a power failure notice signal that is an OFF signal.

  Further, a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, from the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 via the payout control I / O port 4210b. It has become. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a becomes LOW through the payout control I / O port 4210b and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 releases the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 inverts the logic input to the preset terminal PR and outputs the latched signal to the output terminal. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 4210b and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 sets the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal. The 1D terminal which is a D input terminal, the 1CK terminal which is a clock input terminal, and the GND terminal which is a ground terminal are grounded. The negative logic 1Q terminal obtained by inverting the logic of the 1Q terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-2. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, +5.2 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded, and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. +5.2 V is output. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) first by the electrolytic capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND).

  The + 5.2V output from the third terminal is smoothed by the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2, which are grounded and grounded, to further remove ripples. The smoothed + 5.2V is a Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c, a VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and a payout control I / O port. 4120b is applied to a VCC terminal or the like which is a power supply terminal.

  The VDD terminal of the delivery control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 grounded and grounded, and the VCC terminal of the delivery control I / O port 4120b is electrically connected to the capacitor PC4 grounded and grounded. And +5.2 V input to the VCC terminal are smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, is grounded.

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) incorporated in the payout control MPU 4120a, and is also electrically connected to a grounded capacitor PC5. ing. The VBB terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the capacitor PC5, and is also electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Connected. That is, +5.2 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0; The voltage is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. As a result, as described above, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is reduced to VBB. Since the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 and does not flow through the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, the power supply is supplied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. The stored contents are held by the application of the payment VBB.

[9-3. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control I / O port 4120b, an external WDT 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, and a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f. In addition, as a peripheral circuit, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 MHz in this embodiment) is mainly configured. Here, the external WDT 4120c will be described first, followed by various kinds of input / output signals such as a payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f, and a main control I / O port. Various input / output signals of the payout control I / O port and the like will be described.

[9-3-1. External WDT (External Watchdog Timer)]
The +5.2 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c, as shown in FIG. The external WDT 4120c is for resetting the payout control MPU 4120a, and has a built-in watchdog timer. The external WDT 4120c has a function of monitoring the voltage of +5.2 V input to the Vcc terminal and a function of monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally. When the voltage of +5.2 V reaches a threshold value (4.2 V in this embodiment), a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal, or the payout control I / O is sent from the payout control MPU 4120a. If an external WDT clear signal is not input to the CK terminal within the clear signal release time via the O port 4120b, a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal.

  The TC terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to a capacitor PC6 that is grounded, and the RCT terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor PR1 pulled up to + 5.2V. The above-described clear signal release time can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC6 and the resistance value of the pull-up resistor PR1. In the present embodiment, a time 35 ms (= 1.75 ms × 20 times) corresponding to 20 interrupt timers (1.75 ms) of the payout control MPU 4120a is set as the clear signal release time.

  The negative logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the RST0 terminal which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal which is a reset terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The negative logic RESET terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to +5.2 V by a pull-up resistor PR2. The voltage raised to the +5.2 V side is smoothed by removing a ripple by a capacitor PC7 that is grounded (the capacitor PC7 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is larger than the threshold value, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, the logic becomes HI, the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the payout control I When the voltage input to the RESETN terminal of the / O port 4120b is smaller than the threshold value when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is lower than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Input to the terminal.

  When the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal switches from ON to OFF within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is released, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR2. Then, the logic becomes HI and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, while the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is turned on within the clear signal release time. If the external WDT clear signal is not released while being kept, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  Since the RST0 terminal of the dispensing control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the dispensing control I / O port 4120b are negative logic inputs, the voltage inputted to the Vcc terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value or inputted to the CK terminal. When the external WDT clear signal is ON within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is not released, the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are reset. A capacitor PC8 grounded and grounded is electrically connected to the Vs terminal of the external WDT 4120c, and a capacitor PC9 grounded and grounded is electrically connected to the Vcc terminal. Ripple is removed from +5.2 V input to the Vcc terminal by the capacitor PC9 and smoothed. Further, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the external WDT 4120c, is grounded to the ground, and the positive logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
The +5.2 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the ground and the capacitor PC10 grounded. The +5.2 V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing a ripple. The smoothed + 5.2V is also input to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 in addition to the VCC terminal. The dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from an OUT terminal as an output terminal when +5.2 V is input to its OE terminal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground.

  The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 4120a and the CLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the dispensing control I / O port 4120b. It is input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-3. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 107, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes the drive PIC1. The drive PIC 1 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, when the emitter terminal is grounded and the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminal, the drive signal is an excitation signal from the corresponding collector terminal. A drive pulse is output.

  The +24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 via the Zener diode PZD0 as shown in FIG. The anode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to + 24V, and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1. + 24V input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 becomes a drive power supply of the payout motor 744. The base terminal of the drive PIC1 is electrically connected to the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and corresponds to the payout motor drive signal output from the output pins PC0 to PC3. A drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is supplied from the collector terminal to the respective phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A) of the payout motor 744 via the resistors PR3 to PR6 and the prize ball case substrate 754 shown in FIG. Phase). These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents flowing through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 744, and rotate the payout motor 744. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. If the back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive PIC1, the drive PIC1 is damaged. For protection, the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 and the cathode terminal of the zener diode PZD0 are electrically connected.

[9-3-4. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120e is a circuit to which detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, the body frame opening switch 619, the error canceling switch 860a, and the ball removing switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 are input. First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input will be described. Subsequently, a circuit to which a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619 is input, and a circuit to which a detection signal from the error release switch 860a will be input. The circuit to which the detection signal is input from the ball release switch 860b will be described.

[9-3-4 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). The switch is turned on (conducting) in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 108, one end of the door frame open switch 618 is applied with +12 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 via the payout control board 4110, and the other end of the door frame open switch 618 is It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 via the resistors PR30 and PR31. Between the connection between the resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31, a resistor PR32 grounded and grounded and an electrolytic capacitor PC30 grounded and grounded are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor PTR30 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR33 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR30 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to + 5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR34, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR31 via a resistor PR35. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 via the resistor PR36.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR31 is electrically connected to the resistor PR35, and is also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR37 grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR31 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to + 5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR38, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Are electrically connected to predetermined input pins. When the transistor PTR31 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a door open signal.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the resistor PR36, and is also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR39 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR32 is grounded to the ground, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97, and the transistor PTR32 is open with the emitter terminal grounded to the ground. It is configured as a collector output type. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected via a wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100, and is pulled up to + 12V by this pull-up resistor. By turning on / off the transistor PTR32, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR30 and PR32 and the electrolytic capacitor PC30 has a door frame opening switch 618 when the door frame 5 is opened from the main frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main frame 3. Is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing a fluctuation in the voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the circuit repeatedly turn ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR33 and the transistor PTR30 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR35 and PR37 and the transistor PTR31 is Is a last-stage switch circuit that outputs a door open signal to the dispensing control I / O port 4120b by being turned ON / OFF by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit, and includes resistors PR36 and PR39 and a transistor PTR32. This circuit is a last-stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by being turned ON / OFF by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit.

  In a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that +12 V supplied through the door frame open switch 618 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit to prevent By being applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 forming the switch circuit, the transistor PTR30 is turned on, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned on. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is reduced to the ground side, and the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the last-stage switch circuit is also shifted to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned off, and the last-stage switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Then, a voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is pulled up to +12 V by a pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and a frame opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed by the body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so that + 12V is cut off by the door frame open switch 618, and the base of the transistor PTR30 constituting the first-stage switch circuit. When the voltage applied to the terminal is reduced to the ground side, the transistor PTR30 is turned off, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned off. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is increased to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR34, and this voltage is applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the last-stage switch circuit. , The transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned ON, and the last-stage switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is reduced to the ground side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is output. Is output to the main control board 4100, the frame open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW due to the reduction of the voltage applied to.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the first-stage switch circuit is turned on and the last-stage switch circuit is turned off. The door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. When the door frame is closed by the body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the first-stage switch circuit is turned off and the last-stage switch circuits are both turned on. An open signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame open information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

[9-3-4 (b). Circuit to which detection signal from main frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conducting), and the body frame 3 is connected to the outer frame 2. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 108, +12 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is applied to one end of the body frame opening switch 619 via the payout control board 4110, and the other end of the body frame opening switch 619 is It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 via the resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41. Between the connection between the resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41, a resistor PR42 grounded and grounded and an electrolytic capacitor PC31 grounded and grounded are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor PTR33 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR43 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR33 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to + 5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR44, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR34 via a resistor PR45. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 via the resistor PR46.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR34 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45 as well as to the ground and the resistor PR47 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR34 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to + 5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR48, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Are electrically connected to predetermined input pins. By turning on / off the transistor PTR34, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a body frame opening signal.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the resistor PR46 and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR49. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR35 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32, and also electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. , The transistor PTR35 is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected via a wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100, and is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor. By turning on / off the transistor PTR35, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal. The frame opening information output signal is output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 in addition to being output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35, and is output by the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32. An OR circuit is configured.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR40 and PR42 and the electrolytic capacitor PC31 has a body frame opening switch 619 when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. Is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing a fluctuation in the voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the device repeatedly turn ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR43 and the transistor PTR33 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR47 and the transistor PTR34 is This is a last-stage switch circuit that outputs a body frame opening signal to the dispensing control I / O port 4120b by being turned on / off by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit, and includes a resistor PR46, PR49 and a transistor PTR35 The configured circuit is a last-stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by being turned on / off by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit.

  When the main frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is ON, so that +12 V supplied via the main frame open switch 619 is absorbed by the anti-chattering circuit to prevent the chattering from occurring at the first stage. The transistor PTR33 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 forming the switch circuit, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned on. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is reduced to the ground side, and the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the last-stage switch circuit is also shifted to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned off, and the last-stage switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the body frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Then, a voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is pulled up to +12 V by a pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and a frame opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the main frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is OFF, so that +12 V is cut off by the main frame open switch 619, and the base of the transistor PTR 33 constituting the first-stage switch circuit is turned off. When the voltage applied to the terminal is reduced to the ground side, the transistor PTR33 is turned off, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned off. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned off, the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 and the voltage is increased to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR44. Therefore, this voltage is applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the last-stage switch circuit. , The transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned on, and the last-stage switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is reduced to the ground side, and the body frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the input pin of the dispensing control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is output. Is output to the main control board 4100, the frame open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW due to the reduction of the voltage applied to.

  As described above, in a state where the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame release switch 619 is turned on, the first-stage switch circuit is turned on and the last-stage switch circuits are both turned off. A main frame release signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame open information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. In the state closed by the outer frame 2, when the body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the first-stage switch circuit is turned off and the last-stage switch circuits are both turned on. An open signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame open information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducting). Even when the door frame 5 is released from the main frame 3, the main frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 even when the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducting). State. As described above, by adopting a normally closed switch as the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when a short circuit occurs. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 can determine the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main frame 3 or the state where the main frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (a door frame opening switch 618 ′ and a body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 5 is closed from the body frame 3, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 5 is opened to the body frame 3. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is opened from the main frame 3, and the main frame opening switch 619' is disconnected and the switch is turned off. Is turned off (cut), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, even when the normally open switches are used for the door frame opening switch 618 'and the body frame opening switch 619', for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even in the case of disconnection. The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 can determine a state in which the door frame 5 is opened from the main frame 3 and a state in which the main frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2.

[9-3-4 (c). Circuit to which the detection signal from the error release switch is input]
The 1st pin as the output pin of the error release switch 860a is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50 as shown in FIG. 108, and the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Is electrically connected to the input pin PA0. The first pin of the error release switch 860a is electrically connected to the second pin, and the third and fourth pins are grounded. Accordingly, when the error release switch 860a is not operated, the first and second pins are pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, while when the error release switch 860a is operated, the first pin is pulled up. The second pin and the second pin are electrically connected to the third and fourth pins, thereby being pulled down to the ground side.

  The error release switch 860a is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is smoothed by removing a ripple by a capacitor PC32 that is grounded (the capacitor PC32 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the error release switch 860a is not operated, the error release detection signal which is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR50 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated, the error release detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-4 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the ball-off switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 108, the first pin serving as the output pin of the ball-pulling switch 860b is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR51, and the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Is electrically connected to the input pin PA1. The 1st pin of the ball removing switch 860b is electrically connected to the 2nd pin, and the 3rd and 4th pins are grounded. Accordingly, when the ball-pull switch 860b is not operated, the first and second pins are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, while when the ball-pull switch 860b is operated, the first pin is pulled up. The second pin and the second pin are electrically connected to the third and fourth pins, thereby being pulled down to the ground side.

  The ball removal switch 860b is electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is smoothed by removing a ripple by a capacitor PC33 grounded (the capacitor PC33 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the ball pulling switch 860b is not operated, a ball pulling detection signal which is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR51 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the ball removal detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 99 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives, from the CR unit 6, the BRDY that is a ball request signal and the BRQ that is a single payout operation start request signal via the game ball or other device connection terminal plate 869. Is supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from 24 V AC supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 99 are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 connects the rental device such as a game ball. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible via terminal board 869. And are output. As shown in FIG. 109, input / output circuits for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly include photocouplers PIC60 to PIC64 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 via the resistor PR60. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC60. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. At times, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 via a resistor PR61. It is electrically connected to the terminal. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61 and also electrically connected to the pull-up resistor R63 pulled up to the + 5.2V side.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61, and is also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR64 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to + 5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR65, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 107. Are electrically connected to predetermined input pins. When the transistor PTR60 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as the CR connection signal 1.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor TR61 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR62 but also to the ground and the resistor PR66 grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to + 5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR67, and is electrically connected to a firing timing circuit 4130c described later. When the transistor PTR61 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 changes, and the signal is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR61 and PR64 and the transistor PTR60 is a switch circuit, and when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off and pulled. When the voltage raised by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60, the transistor PTR60 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is reduced to the ground side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is being applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is reduced to the ground side. The PTR 60 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PTR65, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Will be entered.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 is also a switch circuit, and when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 turns off and pulls down. When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61, the transistor PTR61 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is reduced to the ground side, and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61 is reduced to the ground side, so that the transistor The PTR 61 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PTR67, and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. This switch circuit constitutes a part of an input circuit of a firing control input circuit 4130a described later.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 via the resistor PR68 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. The resistor PR68 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC61. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC61 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. I have. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR69. It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. When the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 61 is reduced to the ground side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 61 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR69, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 61 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 via the resistor PR70 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62. The resistor PR70 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC62. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC62 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned off. I have. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to + 5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR71 and is selected in advance from the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b. It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. When the photocoupler PIC62 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the dispensing control I / O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 62 is reduced to the ground side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 62 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 62 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  The EXS signal output from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 107 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR72. +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73. The resistor PR73 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC63. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is It is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. , Is raised to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 63 is reduced to the ground side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is To turn OFF, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 63 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR74, and EXS whose logic becomes HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 63 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The PRDY signal output from the output pin PB1 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 107 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR75. +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76. The resistor PR76 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC64. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned on. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is It is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 via a ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869, and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC64 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 64 is reduced to the ground side, and the PRDY whose logic becomes LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is To turn OFF, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 64 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR77, and PRDY whose logic becomes HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 64 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-6. Various input / output signals of payout control I / O port]
Next, various input / output signals of the payout control I / O port 4120b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control I / O port 4120b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control MPU 4120a via the data bus.

  As shown in FIG. 107, serial data from the main control board 4100 is input to an RXD terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, as a main payment serial data reception signal. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 4100 from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b is output as a payer serial data transmission signal.

  To each input pin of the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b, an error release detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input to the input pin PA0, and a ball release from the ball release switch 860b is input to the input pin PA1. The detection signal is input, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 for notifying the completion of normal reception of the payment main serial data reception signal is input to the input pin PA2, and the input pin PA3 is input to the input pin PA3 from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The power failure notice signal 1 has been input. A predetermined input pin of each of the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b is provided with a BRQ signal, which is a signal of a single payout operation start request signal from the CR unit 6, and a ball lending request from the CR unit 6. Various signals from the CR unit 6, such as a BRDY signal, a CR connection signal 1 that indicates whether or not the payout control board 4110 is electrically connected to the CR unit 6, and a door from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to the frame opening signal and the body frame opening signal from the body frame opening switch 619, a detection signal and the like from the full tank switch 550 are input.

  On the other hand, from each output pin of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b, an EXS signal is transmitted from the output pin PB0 to notify that one payout operation has been started or finished, and the output pin PB1 Then, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible or impossible is output, and the latch state of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is released from the output pin PB2. ACK signal for notifying completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal is output from the output pin PB3, and an external WDT clear signal is output from the output pin PB4 to the external WDT 4120c. Have been. A payout motor drive signal is output from output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and an error LED is displayed from each output pin of the output port PD of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The driving signal of the device 860c is output.

[9-4. Circuit of launch control section]
Next, the firing control unit 4130 will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, the firing control section 4130 includes a firing control input circuit 4130a, an oscillation circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. Here, the firing control input circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 110, and a detailed description of the configuration of the firing timing circuit 4130c and the like will be described later.

[9-4-1. Launch control input circuit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the detection signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 and the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 of the handle device 500 are relayed to the firing control input circuit 4130a of the payout control board 4110 by the handle relay. It is input via the board 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The touch switch 516 detects whether a palm or a finger touches the rotary handle main body 506 of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 47, and the firing stop switch 518 is a single-shot button of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. By operating 520, it is detected whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the touch switch 516 is input will be described, and subsequently, a circuit to which a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 will be input will be described.

[9-4-1a. Circuit to which detection signal from touch switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 110, one end of the touch switch 516 applies +12 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 via the resistor PR80 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to the +12 V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the payout control board 4110, and the resistance PR81 is changed. Through this, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR81, the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR82 grounded and grounded and a capacitor PC80 grounded and grounded. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor C80. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR80 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to + 5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR83 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. By turning on / off the transistor PTR80, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR81 and PR82 and the transistor PTR80 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the touch switch 516. When a palm or a finger is not touching the rotary handle main body 506, a handle relay board is provided. When the voltage pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor provided at 192 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80, the transistor PTR80 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is reduced to the ground side, and the touch detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the palm or the finger touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is reduced to the ground side, the transistor PTR80 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the touch detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

[9-4-1b. Circuit to which the detection signal from the firing stop switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 110, one end of the firing stop switch 518 receives +12 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. The other end of the firing stop switch 518 is pulled up to +12 V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the payout control board 4110. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 via PR85. The base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is electrically connected to the resistor PR85, and is also electrically connected to the resistor PR86 grounded to the ground and the capacitor PC81 grounded to the ground. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor C81. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR81 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to + 5.2V by a pull-up resistor PR87 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. By turning on / off the transistor PTR81, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR85 and PR86 and the transistor PTR81 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, and is provided on the handle relay board 192 when the single button 520 is not operated. When the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81, the transistor PTR81 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is reduced to the ground side, and the firing stop detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the single button 520 is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is reduced to the ground side, the transistor PTR81 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR87, and the firing stop detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

  The switch circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 shown in FIG. 109 is also a part of the input circuit of the firing control input circuit 4130a, and the CR connection signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61. Are also input to the firing timing circuit 4130c in addition to the touch detection signal and the firing stop signal described above.

[9-5. Various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to external terminal boards]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[9-5-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), the payout control board 4110 sends the payer serial data transmission signal, the payer ACK signal, the power failure notice signal, the frame opening information output information, and the like to the main control board 4100. Output. On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the RAM clear signal, the payout control board 4110 includes a jackpot information output signal such as a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, and a probability variation. A game information signal relating to the game such as a medium information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time reduction medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is input from the main control board 4100.

[9-5-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), in addition to the door frame opening signal and the body frame opening signal, award balls indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. In addition to a number information output signal, a jackpot information output signal such as a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal from the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, an information output signal during probability fluctuation, A game information signal such as a symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784.

  The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) not shown, and monitors a game or the like of the player. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a player determines whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people choose. However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. Therefore, even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits will occur. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the big hit of two rounds or the big hit of 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of big hits for rounds and the number of occurrences of big hits for two rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of big hits for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of big hit gaming state, so the player's gambling will be raised more than necessary. Nor.

  In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until the round-end jackpot is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot information output occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 15 round jackpot information are output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot is generated. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[10. Driving method of firing solenoid]
Next, a method of driving the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 112 is a block diagram showing a driving circuit of a firing solenoid, FIG. 113 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 114 is a diagram showing characteristics of a DC / DC converter. FIG. 115 is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the driving circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 112. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then, the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic and waveform, etc., at predetermined points in the drive circuit will be described.

[10-1. Drive system for firing solenoid]
As shown in FIG. 112, the driving system of the firing solenoid 654 mainly includes a firing control input circuit 4130a, a transmitting circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid driving circuit 4130d, and a ball of the firing control unit 4130 in the payout control board 4110. It comprises a transmission solenoid drive circuit 4130e, a DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831 and an electrolytic capacitor SC0, a power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and a smoothing circuit 851c.

  As described above, when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, the firing control input circuit 4130a outputs the CR unit 6 from the pachinko gaming machine 1. A signal indicating that power (24 VAC) is being supplied is input and output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a CR connection signal, and the touch switch 516 detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the rotary handle main body 506. When the detection signal is input from the shooting stop switch 518, the detection signal is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal, and whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. When the signal is input, the signal is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

  The firing timing circuit 4130c allows or prohibits launching of a game ball by the firing solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the firing stop detection signal from the firing control input circuit 4130a. Specifically, the firing timing circuit 4130c does not input a CR connection signal because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. In the first case, the touch detection signal indicates that the palm or finger is not touching the rotary handle main body 506, and in the second case, the firing stop detection signal indicates that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped. In the third case where the transmission is made, launching of a game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited when any one of the cases is applicable, and launch of a game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted when none of the cases is applicable.

  The firing timing circuit 4130c receives the clock signal from the transmitting circuit 4130b, and when permitting launch of a game ball by the firing solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute are generated based on the clock signal as shown in FIG. , A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward the game area 1100, and is output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. Is generated and output to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 by a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4130e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4130da, an amplifier circuit 4130db, a voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and a switching circuit 4130dd. The shunt regulator circuit 4130da is supplied with + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and the DC + 2.5V stabilized from this + 5.2V (DC + 2.5V; + 2.5V ") and supplies the same to the amplifier circuit 4130db.

  As shown in FIG. 113A, the shunt regulator circuit 4130da mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90. This shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 has reduced temperature drift due to ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is maintained at a constant voltage to a load. +5.2 V is applied to the REF terminal as the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal as the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 via the resistor PR90, and is input to the REF terminal by the resistor PR90. Current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4130db. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing a ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage) by a capacitor PC90 grounded to ground (the capacitor PC90 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). Note that the terminal A, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 112, the amplifier circuit 4130db amplifies the +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da by a factor of 2 to create DC + 5.0V (DC + 5.0V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.0V”). The power is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay board 192.

  As shown in FIG. 113A, the amplifier circuit 4130db mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC91. The operational amplifier PIC91 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit. To the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, + 2.5V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 of the shunt regulator circuit 4130da is applied. Is connected to the other end of the resistor PR91, one end of which is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91. Is electrically connected to The resistance values of the resistors PR91 and PR92 are set such that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC91 becomes twice. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is, as described above, + 5.0V obtained by amplifying + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91 to twice, as described above, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the handle. The signal is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing a ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by a capacitor PC91 that is grounded and grounded (the capacitor PC91 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). Note that the +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC92 which is grounded.

  Returning to FIG. 112, the potentiometer 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor and includes a first fixed terminal, a second fixed terminal, and a variable terminal, and the first fixed terminal is connected to +5.0 V from the amplifier circuit 4130db described above. Is supplied, and the second fixed terminal is electrically connected to the resistor PR100 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The other end of the resistor PR100 is grounded. When the rotation handle main body front 506 is rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 also rotates, and the voltage applied to the first fixed terminal and the second fixed terminal is applied to the rotation handle body front 506. In accordance with the rotation operation of the potentiometer 512, that is, according to the rotational position of the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512, and the divided voltage can be taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is passed through the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is connected to resistors PR93 and PR94, which will be described later, in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 (FIG. 113B). ), And the voltage assigned to the divided resistor PR94 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage.

  As described above, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 is grounded to the ground via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 as shown in FIG. 113 (b). The ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC93 (the capacitor PC93 also plays a role of a low-pass filter), and the discharge solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 is controlled. The voltage is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower. This operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage, as shown in FIG. 113 (b). The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of volts and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage. The inverting input terminal (-terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92. The output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by one, that is, outputs the voltage as it is in the volt order. Although the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage on the order of volts, the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 outputs the first-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage from the steering wheel device 500 and the voltage to the second-stage operational amplifier PIC93. Circuit separation from the first stage output side circuit. Thus, a voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first-stage input-side circuit to the first-stage output-side circuit, and the influence of the first-stage output-side circuit can be prevented from being exerted on the first-stage input-side circuit. Note that the +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC94 that is grounded.

  The output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR93 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (−terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR93 has the non-inverting input terminal ( + Terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR93, the other end of which is grounded to the ground, in addition to the other end of the resistor PR93. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 is a volt-order voltage because the input voltage, which is a volt-order voltage, is simply output as it is, as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94. The divided voltage is applied to the divided resistor PR94 and applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (-terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage increases the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by one, that is, outputs the voltage on the order of millivolts as the emission intensity target voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. I do. Although the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage which is the voltage which the resistor PR94 of the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94 directly outputs, the resistance of the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94 is used. The circuit separation between the subsequent-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage assigned to the PR 94 and the subsequent-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is realized. Thus, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the subsequent-stage input side circuit to the subsequent-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the subsequent-stage output side circuit can be prevented from being exerted on the subsequent-stage input side circuit. Note that the +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 is smoothed by removing a ripple by a capacitor PC95 that is grounded.

  Returning to FIG. 112, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 is obtained by flowing a resistor PR101 having one end grounded to ground, and the voltage on the order of millivolts provided by the resistor PR101 is used as a firing control voltage as a voltage comparison circuit. 4130 dc. The emission intensity target voltage, which is a voltage on the order of millivolts, is also applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. As described above, the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc are, as described above, the resistance from the voltage of the volt order to the voltage of the millivolt order in the dispensing control board 4110 (the emission solenoid drive circuit 4130d). The voltage is reduced by the voltage applied to PR101 and PR94. That is, since the voltage is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control substrate 4110, the wiring pattern is hardly affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc operates with the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage at a voltage on the order of millivolts. On the other hand, between the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball firing device 650, and between the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500, wiring (harness) is provided. The wiring (harness) is susceptible to the influence of noise, and a voltage of the order of volts suppresses the influence of noise between the substrate devices.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is an inversion type circuit that compares the emission control voltage with the emission intensity target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4130dd. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is a logical output of HI or LOW. When the firing control voltage is higher than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the firing control voltage is obtained. Is HI (hereinafter, referred to as “H”) when is smaller than the emission intensity target voltage. As described above, since the output logic becomes H or L according to the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4130dd as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4130dd includes a current from the DC / DC converter 831a included in the firing power supply board 831 according to an ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparing circuit 4130dc every time the firing reference pulse is input from the firing timing circuit 4130c. The combined current obtained by combining the current resulting from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the current is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is input, switching circuit 4130dd outputs a combined current obtained by combining the current from DC / DC converter 831a and the current resulting from discharging electrolytic capacitor SC0. When the OFF signal is input from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc while flowing to the firing solenoid 654, the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. That is, the switching circuit 4130dd receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and outputs the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. When the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is flowing and the voltage divided by the resistor PR101 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes L, and A signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit 4130dd cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. Due to this cutoff, the current stops flowing through the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes H again, and the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd. As described above, 4130dd causes the firing solenoid 654 to flow a combined current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined. As described above, in accordance with the ON / OFF signal from voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, switching circuit 4130dd outputs the combined current obtained by combining the current from DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC0 to firing solenoid 654. The switching circuit 4130dd performs self-excited oscillation in response to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and controls the current to flow to the emission solenoid in order to supply the current to the emission solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4130dd functions as a “self-excited oscillation constant current circuit”, and brings the emission control voltage closer to the emission intensity target voltage. As a result, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the firing solenoid 654 can be driven with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch the game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and is in the original rotational position where the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is the second fixed voltage of the potentiometer 512. The voltage is applied to the resistor PR100 applied to the terminal. That is, the voltage assigned to the resistor PR100 is applied to the second fixed terminal of the potentiometer 512 as an offset voltage. This offset voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is output to switching circuit 4130dd, switching circuit 4130dd combines the current from DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC0. The combined current flows through firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing strength of the firing solenoid 654 jumps at least over the firing rail 660 shown in FIG. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is the emission intensity target voltage, the current corresponding to the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined). When the combined current flows through the firing solenoid 654, the game ball hit by the firing solenoid 654 can jump over the firing rail 660, but along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. Since the ball cannot reach the game area 1100, the ball is received and collected at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the emission solenoid 654 becomes the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows through the firing solenoid 654, all the hit game balls are collected as foul balls. This can prevent the ball from being overlapped with the game ball sent to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, so that the shooting solenoid 654 prevents the overlapping game ball from firing toward the game area 1100. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent a load on the firing solenoid 654 and prevent a failure.

  Further, as described above, the offset voltage is set to a voltage for obtaining the minimum firing intensity corresponding to the original rotation position when the rotation position of the rotary handle main body 506 is at the original rotation position. The game balls hit by the hitting ball firing device 650 along the firing rail 660 and the outer rail 1111 are received as foul balls at the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and are all collected. It has become so. Accordingly, at the time when the player starts rotating the front of the rotary handle 506, even if the player cannot rotate the front of the rotary handle 506 to increase the firing intensity, all the game balls are not played. Since it is possible to jump over the firing rail 660, it is possible to avoid collision of game balls on the firing rail 660. Therefore, before the next game ball is launched by the launch solenoid 654, the player rotates the rotary handle main body 506 to increase the launch intensity, so that the game ball launched this time at the launch intensity is moved to the outer rail. By hitting the previously launched game ball descending along the line 1111, the currently launched game ball together with the previously launched game ball can be made to fly out to the game area 1100. Even if the ball cannot be popped out, it is received as a foul ball at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 located below the foul space 626, and is all collected. In other words, even if the player cannot rotate the front of the rotary handle 506 to increase the firing intensity, the shooting intensity is sufficient to jump over the firing rail 660. Do not collide with each other on the firing rail 660 and clogging of the ball does not occur. Also, when the player rotates the front of the rotary handle 506 to increase the firing intensity, the game ball hit this time at the firing intensity is changed to the previously hit game ball descending along the outer rail 1111. Even if it is not possible to cause the game ball hit this time together with the game ball hit last time to fly out into the game area 1100 by colliding, the foul ball of the foul cover unit 540 located below the foul space 626 as a foul ball. Since all are received and collected at the entrance 542e, the player can rotate the rotary handle main body 506 to further increase the firing intensity, so that the game ball can jump out to the game area 1100 without clogging of the ball. . In other words, the currently launched game ball hits the previously launched game ball descending along the outer and inner rails 1111 and the currently launched game ball jumps out into the game area 1100 together with the previously launched game ball. Even if it is not possible to make the player feel uncomfortable, the player can rotate the rotary handle main body 506 to further increase the firing intensity, so that the player can play the game ball without clogging the ball. Since the user can jump out to the area 1100, the discomfort can be eliminated. Therefore, the player's discomfort due to the ball clogging at the start of the rotation operation of the rotary handle main body 506 can be eliminated.

  In the present embodiment, by employing the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, the target emission intensity voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is +2.5 V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da. Is amplified by the amplifying circuit 4130db, and is divided by the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, so that the divided voltage is also maintained at the same rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506. In this case, no fluctuation occurs and the voltage is maintained at a constant value. Accordingly, the switching circuit 4130dd causes the firing control voltage to approach the firing intensity target voltage by flowing the merged current to the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650, and the switching circuit 4130dd rotates when the firing control voltage becomes equal to the firing intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the handle body front 506 is held at the same rotational position, the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not fluctuate and a constant current flows, so that the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing intensity launched toward is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent “unevenness” of the game ball caused by driving and firing of the firing solenoid 654.

  In addition, the pachinko island equipment in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system in which the gaming balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are polished and supplied to the pachinko gaming machines again. For this reason, in addition to the heat due to the polishing of the game balls, the heat due to the collision and friction between the game balls, the temperature in the pachinko island equipment is extremely high due to the heat from the power supply board of the pachinko game machine and various electric decorations. . In the present embodiment, as described above, by employing the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, +2.5 V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko equipment. It can be output. Accordingly, since the fluctuation of +2.5 V due to the temperature is suppressed, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the emission intensity target voltage can be suppressed. , The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4130dd. In other words, when the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is the same rotation position, “unevenness” can be suppressed in the firing intensity of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100, and “flying unevenness” of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[10-2. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 114, and the input current at point TA and the output current and output voltage at point TB shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

  First, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from +35 V, as shown in FIG. Specifically, in section A where output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in section B where output voltage Vout is from +30 V to +20 V, output voltage decreases as output voltage Vout decreases. In the section C where the current Iout increases by about 40 mA from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout decreases from +20 V to +10 V, as the output voltage Vout decreases, the output current Iout increases by about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V In the section D from to +5 V, the output current Iout increases by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. Note that the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA from +5 V to near zero V.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as shown in FIG. 114 (b). Relationship. Specifically, in section A where output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, while input current Iin is reduced by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when a current corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 still has a game. When the firing intensity is difficult to reach the area 1100, the current corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin becomes smaller than the output current Iout. The shooting intensity of the game ball launched toward the area 1100 reaches the game area 1100. In the section B in which the output voltage Vout is from +30 V to +20 V, the output current Iout increases by about 40 mA from 360 mA to 400 mA, whereas the input current Iin decreases by about 60 mA from 320 mA to 260 mA, and is compared with the output current Iout. Thus, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases by about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, whereas the input current Iin decreases by about 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. , The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In the section D in which the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout increases by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, whereas the input current Iin decreases by about 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA, and the section B and the section Similarly to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by combining the current of 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle main body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotary handle main body 506 is in the original rotation position where the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated is touched, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. In some cases, the combined current obtained by combining the 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle main body 506 clockwise. Is the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the vehicle is at the limit rotation position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 indicates that the game ball that has already jumped out of the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the stop portion 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering various winning ports. For this reason, the range in which the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a can be taken when the player rotates the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise and plays a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <the value of the output current Iout <1000 mA), which is a current on the order of milliamps.

[10-3. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a fixed rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506, the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 112, the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4130c, and Will be described with reference to FIG. The TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, as described above, and the TC point is a reference pulse for emission from the emission timing circuit 4130c. This is a point for referring to T0.

  As described above, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c allows 100 game balls per minute, that is, 60,000 ms toward the game area 1100 when the launch of the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 is permitted. As shown in FIG. 115A, the pulse width is 30 ms, and the period T is 600 ms, as shown in FIG.

  Here, the player touches the rotary handle main body 506 and touches the rotary handle main body 506 to rotate the rotary handle main body 506 to the limit rotation position, and to perform the DC / DC operation at the original rotation position without rotation. The waveform of output voltage Vout of converter 831a will be described.

  When the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is at the limit rotation position, FIGS. 115 (b) and (c) are shown. As described above, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts flowing to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing through firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to +5 V according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA, which is the maximum output current described above. When the input of the firing reference pulse T0 is stopped after a lapse of 30 ms, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). By shutting off the maximum current to firing solenoid 654, output voltage Vout of DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Vout decreases while the output current Iout increases. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is close to zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 has the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a certain current of 1010 mA, and when the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to around +35 V, charging is continued by a current of 360 mA, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). In other words, the charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from when the current reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses and the next reference pulse T0 is input.

  On the other hand, when the rotation handle main body front 506 is at the original rotation position, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described minimum current, and is applied to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing through firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. And the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the minimum output current described above. Then, when the input of the firing reference pulse T0 is stopped after a lapse of 30 ms, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). By cutting off the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as described above, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases while the output voltage Vout decreases. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A. The electrolytic capacitor SC0 is connected to the output of the DC / DC converter 831a. The charging is started by the current of 360 mA, which is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). In other words, the charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from when the current reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses and the next reference pulse T0 is input.

  As described above, even if the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms after the current firing reference pulse T0 is input due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a. Can be completed within the remaining charging time of 570 ms until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, a case is considered in which a control method in which the DC / DC converter 831a alone supplies a current to the firing solenoid 654 in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period until 30 ms elapses after the input of the firing reference pulse T0. In view of this, in this control method, the current that the DC / DC converter 831a independently supplies to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2A to 3.5A, and this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When driving the firing solenoid 654, a large current larger than 2A to 3.5A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the emission reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated in the cycle T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board is also increased in each cycle T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic components and decorations used for decoration in addition to a momentary large current flowing when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a alone drives the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 during a period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width after the input of the firing reference pulse T0. The amperage-order current supplied from the +37 V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input to when the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the "first current" of the milliamp order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the +37 V DC power supply of the power supply board 851. And electrolytic capacitor When the power supply SC0 charges the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, the power may be dispersed into a "second current" of the milliamp order supplied from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a. it can. Thus, in the period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width after the emission reference pulse T0 is input in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist, the ampere order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 is supplied. The current is supplied from the DC power supply of +37 V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a in a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is present to when the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. The average can be averaged by the supplied “first current” and “second current” in the milliamp order. Therefore, a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply substrate 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate time spent designing operation conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[10-4. Relationship between launch reference pulse from launch timing circuit and sphere sending reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c and the ball feeding reference pulse T1 will be described with reference to FIG. The TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c as described above, and the TD point shown in FIG. 112 refers to the ball sending reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4130c. It is a point to do.

  The ball sending reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5), which is five times the 30 ms that is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, as shown in FIGS. 115 (a) and (e), the ball feeding reference pulse T1 outputs the ball feeding solenoid drive of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. It is input to the circuit 4130e (when the timing t0, 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. By doing so, it is possible to complete the set of game balls to be launched next before the next launch reference pulse T0 is input, and to change the game balls every time the launch reference pulse T0 is input to the game area 1100. Can be launched continuously toward.

[11. Circuit of frame decoration drive amplifier board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a full-wave rectification circuit 194b, a charge / discharge switching circuit 194c, and an LED gradation drive control unit 194d, as shown in FIG. 116, in addition to the +9 V generation circuit 194a shown in FIG. , An electrolytic capacitor WAC0, a resistor WAR0, and the like. As described above, the electromotive force generated in the piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 116 is generated by the operation of the button body 406 (the pressing operation section 405) and the downward movement of the pressing element 406c. When the button main body 406 (the pressing operation section 405) is not operated by bending, the vibration that the bending of the piezoelectric element 425 due to the pressing detection piece 406c is canceled by being pushed upward and the operation returns to the original state is caused by the load. Is performed, the power is alternating current, and after being subjected to full-wave rectification by the full-wave rectifier circuit 194b composed of a low-loss bridge diode, is charged by the electrolytic capacitor WAC0. ing.

  The charge / discharge switching circuit 194c mainly includes a relay drive circuit 194ca, a relay WARY0, and a zener diode WAZD0. The relay drive circuit 194ca is a circuit that supplies a drive current to the coil of the relay WARY0 to turn ON / OFF the relay WARY0. Subsequently, the relay WARY0 is turned on. The relay WARY0 has two switching contacts (referred to as “C contacts”).

  The first C contact is adapted to be supplied with +9 V from the +9 V generation circuit 194a, and the relay WARY0 is turned off when the relay drive circuit 194ca does not supply a drive current to the coil of the relay WARY0. When the relay drive circuit 194ca is supplying a drive current to the coil of the relay WARY0 while the relay drive circuit 194ca is supplying the drive current to the coil of the relay WARY0, the relay WARY0 is turned on to supply + 9V to the LED. The circuit is connected so as to supply the gradation drive control unit 194d. The LED gradation drive control unit 194d applies + 9V supplied from the relay WARY0 to the plurality of color LEDs 430b of the operation unit that makes the entire dial operation unit 401 emit light and the color LED 432d of the operation unit 400 that makes the entire press operation unit 405 emit light. As a drive voltage of the color, based on various commands from the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, a door frame side gradation lighting command for gradation lighting, a door frame side lighting blinking command for light emission in a predetermined color), The LEDs 430b and 432d can be turned on, turned on, and blinked.

  The second C contact is supplied with electric power for charging the electrolytic capacitor WAC0. When the relay drive circuit 194ca does not supply a drive current to the coil of the relay WARY0, the relay WARY0 is turned off. The resistor WAR0 (the resistor WAR0 is provided for each of the plurality of color LEDs 430b and 432d) without the power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 being passed through the LED gradation drive control unit 194d. When the relay drive circuit 194ca supplies a drive current to the coil of the relay WARY0, the relay WARY0 is turned on and the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is turned on when the relay drive circuit 194ca supplies a drive current to the coil of the relay WARY0. The power charged to the operation unit Color bets 400 LED430b, circuitry connected so as not to supply to 432 d. The second C contact to which the electric power charged to the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is supplied is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode WAZD0 whose anode terminal is grounded to the ground, so that the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is charged. By limiting the maximum voltage, the power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is discharged, thereby preventing the color LEDs 430b and 432d from being damaged by the discharged voltage.

  As described above, after turning on the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the + 9V generation circuit 194a can generate + 9V, and the generated + 9V is supplied to the relay drive circuit 194ca, so that the relay drive circuit 194ca causes the relay WARY0 to operate. And the relay WARY0 is turned on. In the state where the relay WARY0 is turned on, the + 9V from the + 9V generation circuit 194a is used as a driving voltage via the LED gradation drive control unit 194d as the color LED 430b. , 432d, while the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off or a power failure (the pachinko hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed is a power failure due to an electrical trouble or a power failure due to a disaster) Is generated, the + 9V generation circuit 194a outputs + 9V Since it cannot be created, +9 V is not supplied to the relay drive circuit 194ca, the relay drive circuit 194ca cannot supply a drive current to the coil of the relay WARY0, and the relay WARY0 is turned off. In this state, the relay WARY0 is turned off. Is configured such that the discharged voltage is supplied to the color LEDs 430b and 432d as the driving voltage by discharging the power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0, and the + 9V from the + 9V generating circuit 194a and the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 The voltage of the charged power is not supplied to the color LEDs 430b and 432d at the same time.

  In a state where a power failure (a power failure due to an electrical trouble in a pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed or a power failure due to an emergency when a disaster occurs) occurs, the power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is discharged. As a result, the discharge voltage is supplied to the color LEDs 430b and 432d as a drive voltage, so that the entire dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can emit light. As a result, even if the pachinko hall is completely dark due to the occurrence of a power failure (a power failure due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed or an emergency power failure in the event of a disaster), The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 emit light by the electric power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed adjacent to the pachinko island equipment. , And the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes an emergency light, which can be used as a mark for the player to evacuate out of the concourse or the pachinko hall. In other words, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can function as landmarks for evacuating a player to a concourse or a pachinko hall by emitting an emergency light during a power outage. I have.

  In addition, when the player merely enjoys operating the pressing operation unit 405 while playing a game, the power failure (the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed may cause a power failure due to an electrical trouble or an emergency in which a disaster occurs). When the pachinko hall becomes completely dark due to the occurrence of a power outage, electric power for causing the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to emit light as an emergency light in the event of a power outage can be generated and charged to the electrolytic capacitor WAC0. Therefore, although the player himself does not notice, it contributes to evacuating other players to the outside of the concourse or pachinko hall.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 supplies + 9V generated by the + 9V generation circuit 194a to the detection switches 432a to 432c of the operation unit 400, and receives detection signals from the detection switches 432a to 432c. In addition, the ground of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the grounds of various boards of the operation unit 400 are electrically connected to each other to be the same ground.

[12. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 117 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 118 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 120 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 118. FIG. 120 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. Various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the board 4100 will be described.

[12-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, an upper starting opening switch 3022, a lower starting opening switch 2109, and a count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) drive the upper plate 301, which is a storage plate. When the pachinko game machine is electrically connected to the lower plate 302 (a device that pays out game balls as lending balls) (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 117 (a). In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared. The command 11H specifies two prize balls,..., The command 1EH specifies 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device for directly paying out gaming balls as a rental ball to an upper plate 301 or a lower plate 302 as a storage plate) are installed adjacent to a game hall (hall). When the gaming machine 1 and the ball rental machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the payout from the main control board 4100 is performed. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command transmitted to the control board 4110. One prize ball is specified in the command 20H, two prize balls are specified in the command 21H,. In 2EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 117C, a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies a self-check. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the dispensing control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[12-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 118 and FIG. 119, the various commands are as follows: special figure 1 tuning effect-related, special figure 2 tuning effect-related, big hit-related, power-on, ordinary figure tuning effect-related, ordinary power actor-related, information display, state It is divided into indication and others.

[12-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronized production]
Special figure 1 entrainment effect related is based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 97, and as shown in FIG. 118, it is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The upper special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands named as special figure 1 synchronizing effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronizing effect end, and fluctuation state designation. To these various commands, "A * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing described later.

[12-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
Special figure 2 entrainment effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97. As shown in FIG. 118, the division includes the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The lower special symbol display 1186 is composed of commands named start of special figure 2 tuning effect, designation of special symbol 2 and end of special figure 2 tuning effect. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command is for instructing the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command is for designating off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 118, the categories of the jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (where “H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the opening of the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2100 of the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 95). The special winning opening 2103 is instructed during opening or opening of the N-th round of the special winning opening 2103, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the closing of the special winning opening 1 between rounds (the special winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). 2103 round), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97). The jackpot ending command is used to inform the jackpot ending command Is intended to instruct the grayed start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or releasing the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the count switch 2110 detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize opening 1 closed display command is sent when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is started). The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count of the winning prize opening 1 is changed (when the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball entered the winning prize opening 2103 is counted. The jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit middle and big winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 118, the power-on section includes various commands named power-on. In this power-on command, "D * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated). ).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, a main control-side power-on process described later is executed. A power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general figure synchronizing effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97, and is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 97 as shown in FIG. The command 1189 is composed of commands entitled to start the general figure synchronizing effect, specify a general pattern, end the general effect synchronizing effect, and specify the state when fluctuating. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), and the variable state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric production effect-related relates to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 95 which are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 97. It is composed of commands called opening per figure, open display of normal power, and ending per figure. To these various commands, “F * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per day is an instruction to start the opening per day, and the opening command for opening the day is started during the opening of the day. Ending state, or when expanding), and the ending per-figure ending command is for instructing the start of ending per-figure drawing.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for the ordinary electric power is transmitted at the time of opening the ordinary electric power (when the pair of movable pieces 2106 is driven by the driving of the starting port solenoid 2105). (When expanding in the left-right direction), and the ending per-figure-ending command is transmitted when the ending per-figure-end is started. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 119, the categories of the notification display are composed of commands named win award display, connection anomaly display, disconnection / short-circuit anomaly display, magnetic detection switch anomaly display, door open, and door close. To these various commands, “6 * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning prize display command indicates that a game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the player wins the special winning opening other than during the big hit (during the operation of the condition device), and the game ball is inserted. (When the count switch 2110 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is instructed to start connection abnormality notification. The disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. When a disconnection or short circuit occurs in the electrical connection of the unit, it indicates that a disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display should be started. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 97.

  The door opening command is issued by the main body frame 3 based on the detection signals (opening signals) from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, a door opening notification is instructed. Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3. If it is in the state, the instruction to end the door opening notification is issued.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning prize display command is transmitted when a prize is won at a special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operation of the condition device). The command is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of sending the command to the controller. , Which is transmitted when any of them is disconnected or short-circuited, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected, and the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (door opening Based on the detection signals from the switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame Is transmitted to the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is opened to the body frame 3), and the door close command is detected when the door is closed ( Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3. State). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 119, the status display section is composed of commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. To these various commands, “7 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a sets “7 * H” as shown in FIG. The command is set as the status, and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a adds “7 * H” as additional information to the received commands. Thus, the command is formed into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted when the error cancellation navigation is performed. And when the frame state changes. Note that these shaped frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 119, the test-related section is composed of various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the sound source IC 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the like shown in FIG. 100). Inspection of various substrates such as the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, a main control-side power-on process described later is executed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 119, the other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 119, a start opening prize, a fluctuation shortening operation end designation, a high probability end designation, a special symbol 1 memory, a special symbol 2 memory, a normal symbol memory, a special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. To these various commands, “9 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of a starting opening winning effect. Based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the lowering of the lowering start effect Based on the detection signal from the starting port switch 2109, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102, respectively, to instruct the start of the fluctuation shortening operation, the fluctuation shortening operation end command The high-probability end designation command instructs a state transition from a high-probability state to a low-probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command includes a special symbol. 1 to 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 95 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 does not display a special symbol change display. The number of balls not used (the number of reserves) is transmitted. The special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reserves (when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 95). The lower special symbol display 1186 on the function display board 1191 is used to convey the number of balls (number of reserves) that are not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol. (A game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. 95, and the number of balls (number of reserves) not yet used for the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 of the function display substrate 1191. The special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is pre-read and used based on the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol change display 1185 on the function display board 1191. The pre-reading effect for informing the notice of the display result by the special symbol display 1185 is instructed, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-fetching effect command is a special symbol 2 reserved specially displayed on the special symbol indicator 1186 below the function display board 1191. Before being used for the symbol variation display, it prefetches and instructs the start of a prefetching effect of notifying a notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 suspension.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting port winning command is a starting port winning command (when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, or when the lower starting port switch is activated). When the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, and the upper left speaker shown in FIG. The main speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. 78 mainly transmit the notification by voice, and the command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is determined by reducing the fluctuation of the specified number of times. At the time (after the elapse of the outage stop period), the high probability end designation command is the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is determined by using the number of high probabilities in the case of “high probability N times”. (After the elapse of the stoppage period), the special symbol 1 storage command is issued when the number of special symbol 1 operation-reserved balls is changed (when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the special symbol 1 on the function display board 1191 is displayed). In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not been used yet in the special symbol change display at 1185, when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves increases, the upper special symbol display The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted at the time when the number of reserved balls is decreased by using the special symbol in the variable display at 1185) (when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102) Then, in a state in which the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 has a reserved number that is not yet used in the variation display of the special symbol, the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102, and the number of reservations increases. And when the number of reserved symbols is reduced by using the special symbol indicator 1186 to display a special symbol on the lower display, and the normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of ordinary symbol 1 activated balls changes. (In a state where the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display substrate 1191 has a reserved number that is not yet used in the variable display of the normal symbol, the game ball further passes through the gate portion 2350. The special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the normal symbol display 1189 to change the number of normal symbols from the number of holds. It is transmitted when the number of balls reserved for operation of the symbol 1 is increased (when the number of retained balls is increased due to the ball entering the upper starting port 2101), and the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is issued to increase the number of balls reserved for the special symbol 2 operation. Sent at the time of addition (when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the number of holdings increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109). (When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal of the above), the fact is notified mainly by voice from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 100 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 to notify by sound, and also monitors the presence or absence of fraud. It is a specification of doing. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start-up winning command, and sounds from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. Some are not notified.

[12-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands received by the main control board 4100 from the payout control board 4110 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  In the frame state 1 command, out of ball, full, in stock of 50 or more, connection abnormalities, and CR not connected are prepared. When the ball is out of space, bit 0 (B0, “B” represents a bit) is set. Value 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 in 50 or more stocks, and bit 3 (B3) is set if the connection is abnormal. 1 is set, and when CR is not connected, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error release navigation command, a ball ball, a counting switch error and a retry error are prepared. In the ball ball, the value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and in the counting switch error, a value is set in bit 3 (B3). 1 is set, and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “counter switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counter switch 751 shown in FIG. 98 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, the frame state is changed, and the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S360 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[13. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on process. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 121. FIG. 123 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt process. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram (range toward the maximum value side) of the operation of the initial value updating type counter, and FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram (minimum) of the operation of the initial value updating type counter. Range toward the value side). First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not a big hit game state is generated, and a big hit determination initial value determination for use in determining an initial value of the big hit determination random number The random number for use, the random number for reach determination used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit gaming state is not generated, and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol shown in FIG. A random number for a variable display pattern to be used for determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol that is variable displayed on the symbol display 1186, and an upper special symbol display 1185 and a lower special symbol display 1186 when a jackpot game state is generated. A jackpot symbol random number for use in determining the derived jackpot symbol and a jackpot symbol used for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number Initial value determination random number, small hit symbol random number for use in determining a small hit symbol derived and displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when generating the small hit game state, A random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol and the like for use in determining an initial value of a random number for a hit symbol are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol hit determination for use in determining whether or not the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. 95 should be opened and closed, and an initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination are determined. A random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal symbol hit to be used, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining a variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 1189 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 to the maximum value and 32767 is the maximum value). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by being incremented by one every time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from a random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value to a maximum value, and then counts up from a minimum value to a random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. Further, the above-described random number for determining a normal symbol hit and the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit are the same as the updating method of the random number for determining a large hit described above.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for jackpot determination, as described above, The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power-on process described later is performed. In FIG. 97, the checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. If the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the stored checksum value (sum value) does not match (when the power is turned off), The main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 97 extracts the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM and updates the random number for the jackpot determination based on the extracted ID code. , An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed value is performed, and the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated in the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination. As described above, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. The first security countermeasure that the ID code is not rewritten even when an external device is used to store the code, and the initial value deriving process is performed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, thereby obtaining the ID code based on the ID code. The second security countermeasure of deriving the same fixed value to prevent the analysis is performed by taking two steps of security countermeasures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value will be described. For example, a person who tries to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method and disassembles the game board 4, and replaces the ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a with the ID code. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination is illegally acquired and the jackpot determination value matches, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a 'provided in the other game board 4'. That is, in the other game board 4 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless on another game board 4 ′, that is, on another pachinko gaming machine 1 ′. At the predetermined intervals obtained, instantaneous blackouts are generated, and at each predetermined interval, even if the aim is to start a game in which the game ball is thrown into the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. A game state cannot be generated.

[13-2. Movement of counter of initial value update type]
As shown in FIG. 152, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when clearing the RAM), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM, as shown in FIG. An initial value deriving process for constantly deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination based on the extracted ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the fixed value to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the random number for the jackpot determination is updated as the random number for the initial value determination for the jackpot determination. An initial value lottery process is performed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the counter of the initial value update type counts up from the value obtained by lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is In the third cycle, the value is counted up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, as a range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set in the low probability, and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value is read in the high probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the probability change determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, as a range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), a case where the value 10 to the value 209 is set for the low probability and the value 10 to the value 339 for the high probability is considered. As shown in the figure, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. Will be set to In such a case, a period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the timing when the initial value becomes 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), Compared with the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value drawing process is much lower in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) And the range from the value following this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter The probability that the lottery is performed by the initial value lottery process is extremely low as compared with the range. Then, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is upwardly started by irradiating the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 with radio waves. If a fraudulent act of pretending to be in the mouth 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes any value within the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that the probability is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. When the value is set to a range closer to the maximum value side, the timing before the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes the value 0, before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). The period between the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability and the value 31767 for high probability) is reached, and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability and value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) When compared with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much higher in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is better than the latter range. Therefore, the probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely high. Then, the counter of the initial value update type has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (the value 32667 for the low probability and the value 31767 for the high probability) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). Of these, any value becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process and is set in the random number for the initial value determination for jackpot determination described above, so that from the value obtained in this lottery to the maximum value It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , From the value obtained in the lottery to the maximum value. That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, from the intermediate value between the minimum value and the maximum value (value 16384) to the maximum value side. When the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes a value 0, the value (low value) immediately before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes 0 is set. The period up to the time when the probability becomes the value 32667 and the value with the high probability becomes 31767) is irregular, and is rich in randomness. Thus, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is raised by irradiating the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 with radio waves. Even if a fraudulent act of pretending to be in the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is determined to be one of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in a range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) until the counter reaches the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) in the second cycle The required time is time T0. In the third cycle from time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . In the fourth cycle from time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . As described above, in the counter of the initial value update type, the counter to be updated has a fluctuation with respect to the time when the updated counter becomes the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range). (By removing the) from the player.

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a main control-side power-on process as shown in FIGS. When the main control-side power-on process starts, the main control MPU 4100a sets a stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates an address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether a power failure notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, when the voltage drops and becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. You. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S14 is performed based on a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S14, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 has been operated (step S16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S16, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S16, the RAM clear is performed. The value 0 is set to the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a game related to a game such as a probability change, an unpaid prize ball and the like stored in a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a. This flag indicates whether or not the information is to be deleted. The flag is set to 1 when the game information is deleted, and to 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Following step S18 or step S20, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S22). In the wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system for controlling the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the liquid crystal control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 100 is started (booted). In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, it is determined whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S26, whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. Is determined (step S28). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S32). This setting includes setting a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, reading power recovery time information from a ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and performing the power recovery. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, `` power recovery '' means, besides the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is turned off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, the high frequency irradiation is detected and reset, It also includes the status after returning.

  Subsequent to step S32, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S24, that is, when erasing the game information, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Or, in step S30, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (it is the value 0), that is, when the main control-side power-off process is not completed normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared ( Step S36). Specifically, this is performed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM and set as an initial value). The random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot determination used for determining the initial value of the random number for the jackpot determination described above is used when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated to erase the game information and when the sum values do not match. Or, when the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is extracted, and the random number for jackpot determination is determined based on the extracted ID code. , An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set.

  Subsequent to step S36, a work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S38). For this setting, the initial information is read from the main control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing are performed (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 118 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared and initialization has been performed is generated. A test command for performing various inspections of the control board 4140, which is divided into the test relations shown in FIG. 119, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, interrupt initial setting is performed (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, interrupt permission setting is performed. (Step S44). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S46, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning, and the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110b. Is entered from The determination in step S48 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S48, a non-hit random number updating process is performed (step S50). In this non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S50, the process returns to step S46, where the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S48, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. For example, the non-hit random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeatedly performed. Note that the processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when a power failure notice signal is input in step S48, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Following step S52, the starting port solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol memory display 1184, and the lower special symbol memory indicator 1187 shown in FIG. Then, the drive signals output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, and the like are stopped (step S54).

  After step S54, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated value is stored (step S56). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG, as described above.

  Subsequent to step S56, the value 1 is set to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, clear setting of the watchdog timer is performed (step S60). As described above, this clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and thereafter the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control-side power-on process again. The processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control-side power-off processing".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs a main control-side power-on process by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S30, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally. Has been inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[13-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 121 and 122.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 123 (Step S70). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control-side power-on processing (main control-side main processing).

  Subsequent to step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, a detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020, 3020 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 2104, 2201 shown in FIG. 95, and a large winning opening shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting a game ball entered in 2103 and an upper start port switch shown in FIG. 97 for detecting a game ball entered in the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97 that detects a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting a game ball, and a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraud using a magnet shown in FIG. A payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 indicating that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later is read, and the input information is input information. Store in the storage area. In addition, a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 and a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102 are read. And the other start port winning command corresponding to the command shown in FIG. 119 is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, if there is a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and if there is a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109, The start port winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 and a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2103 are provided. , A detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, and a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102. , And a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350 is read first as the first time when this switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. Are read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting switch 3022, the lower starting switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are transmitted for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for comparison and the reading twice for the second to fourth times, erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, or the like can be avoided. As a result, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting switch 3022, the lower starting switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S74, a timer subtraction process is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 are turned on in accordance with the special symbol and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric accessory control process described later, the normal symbol and the The payout control board 4110 normally sends various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), in addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process. When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal notifying that the ACK signal has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S76, a hit random number update process is performed (step S78). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for the big hit symbol, and the random number for the small hit symbol are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination). Counts up. For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value update type counter as described above, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value. It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by being incremented by 1 every time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination. When the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for jackpot determination, the random number updating process for the jackpot determination updates the random number for jackpot determination initial value determination. The random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination random number and the like are the same as the above-described method of updating the big hit determination random number, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this embodiment, the main control side power-on process (main control side) shown in FIG. The non-hit random number updating process in step S50 in the main main process) and the hit random number updating process in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine are updated. When the number of times of execution of the non-hit random number updating process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated due to unevenness in the processing time of The random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are determined in step S5. Or as a mechanism to only update the non Toraku random number update processing.

  Subsequent to step S78, a prize ball control process is performed (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 117 for reading out the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out game balls based on the input information is created. The self-check command shown in FIG. 117 for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. The created award ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95 and enters, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110, or the prize ball command is issued. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 4110 has normally completed the reception is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. And sends it to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, a frame command receiving process is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state display shown in FIG. In the frame command receiving process of step S82, when the various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 4110 of that is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. . Further, the command normally received as the payer serial data is shaped into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, frame State 2 command)), and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S82, a fraud detection process is performed (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal is input from the count switch 2110 when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2103), and the like. Then, a winning abnormality display command classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 119 as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  After step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the value of the counter for updating the above-described random number for jackpot determination is taken out, and it is determined whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big jackpot). It is determined whether or not a game state is to be generated (referred to as “special lottery”), and the value of a counter for updating the random number for the big hit symbol is taken out, and a certainty variable hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM is determined. For example, it is determined whether or not they match (determination of whether or not to generate a probability change). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of a probable change) set higher than normal (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above, and read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 in the high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S86, the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. The determination is made based on whether or not the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is included in the big hit determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the upper starting port switch 3022, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 118 are created, while the lottery result is based on the lower starting port switch 2109. The special command 2185 creates various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 118 and stores them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and also displays the upper special symbol display 1185 or the upper special symbol display according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so that the lower special symbol indicator 1186 is turned on, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. Further, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is set, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1) classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 95 is opened and closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2103 changes from the closed state to the open state is two, the figure The two round indicator lamps 1190a of the round indicator 1190 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the two round display lamp 1190a is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of rounds is fifteen, the fifteen round display lamp 1190b of the round indicator 1190 shown in 89 is set. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1190b is set so as to be turned on, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the gaming state display 1183 is turned on in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not the probability variation has occurred. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S86, a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is performed (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate value storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as the gate information by extracting the value of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above. To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. It is like that. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. I do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece 2106 is to be opened and closed is determined based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed in this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the left-right direction, so that a game state in which game balls can be received in the lower starting port 2102 becomes advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands which are classified as related to the ordinary symbol tuning effect shown in FIG. 118 are created, and are transmitted as transmission information. The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1189 in accordance with the determined variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol while being stored in the transmission information storage area. It is stored in the output information storage area. Also, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric winning effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and an output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 is set to open and close the movable piece 2106, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern random number The variable display pattern is determined, and various commands classified as related to the general figure synchronizing effect shown in FIG. 118 are created. In addition, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1189 according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and the output information described above as the output information. Store in the storage area.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on the output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110, In this state, in addition to outputting a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103, and outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 that opens and closes the movable piece 2106. , 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signal, etc. It outputs various information (game information) signals relating to the game to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S90, a peripheral control board command transmission process is performed (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main circumference serial data. This transmission information includes various commands, which are created in the main control timer interrupt processing of this routine and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related and special figure 2 Commands, various commands classified as jackpot-related, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general-tune synchronizing production-related, various commands classified as ordinary electric duo production-related, as shown in FIG. 119, Various commands classified for notification display, various commands classified for status display, various commands classified for test, and various commands classified for others are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  Subsequent to step S92, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

  After step S94, the register is switched (returned) (step S96), and this routine ends. Here, when the main control-side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the main control MPU 4100a saves the contents of the general-purpose registers on a stack by hardware. This prevents destruction of the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets interruption permission after the return in step S96.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit in FIG. 124. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ball release switch operation determination process, and FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a corner switch history creation process, FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a sprocket home position determination skip process, FIG. 131 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ball protrusion determination process, and FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of a prize ball stock number addition process for balls. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of a prize ball stock number adding process, FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of a stock monitoring process, FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process, and FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting process, FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ball-pulling-out setting process, FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ball-clamping operation setting process, and FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an inconsistency counter reset determination process, FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error release switch operation determination process, and FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating a payout operation by ball lending. Signal processing (A), input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit (A) It is to the timing chart.

  First, the payout control section power-on processing will be described, followed by the payout control section timer interrupt processing, ball release switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket home position determination skip processing, ball projection determination processing, award determination. Prize ball stock number addition processing for balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental, stock monitoring processing, payout ball removal determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball movement setting processing, ball removal setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing The following describes the mismatch counter reset determination processing and the error release switch operation determination processing. It should be noted that the ball removal switch operation determination processing, the rotation angle switch history creation processing, the sprocket home position determination skip processing, the bulging judgment processing, the prize ball stock number addition processing for winning balls, the prize ball stock number addition processing for ball lending, stock The monitoring processing, the payout ball removal determination setting processing, the retry operation monitoring processing, the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, and the error release switch operation determination processing are one processing of the main operation setting processing in step S562 in the processing of turning on the power of the payout control unit described later. Performed as ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket home position determination skip processing, ball protrusion determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, mismatch counter reset determination processing, error release switch operation determination processing, Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental, stock monitoring Management and priority in the order of dispensing ball vent determination setting process is set.

[14-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs a payout control unit power-on process as shown in FIGS. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a sets an interrupt mode (step S500). In this interrupt mode, the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU 4120a is set. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is performed with priority.

  Following step S500, input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) are performed (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, input / output setting of the I / O port of the payout control MPU 4120a is performed.

  Subsequent to step S502, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b shown in FIG. 106 is started (step S504). The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b includes a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage between +24 V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between +12 V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result indicates that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. In step S504, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is started. The logic of this power failure clear signal becomes LOW through the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 and is input to the clear terminal. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The state can be inverted and output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S504, wait timer process 1 is performed (step S506), and it is determined whether a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of electric power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage during the period from when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

  Subsequent to step S508, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is stopped (step S510). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 4120b and is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal. Thus, the payout control MPU 4120a can set the D-type flip-flop PIC22 to the latch state. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from its output terminal 1Q when it latches the state in which the logic is input to the preset terminal PR terminal as LOW.

  Subsequent to step S510, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 4100e has been operated (step S512). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

  If the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S512, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S514). If the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S512, the payout is performed. The value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the CR communication information storage area. A flag indicating whether or not payout information related to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set is deleted. Are set to 0 when not deleted. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, a setting is made to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, for example, to write (store) or read out payout information.

  Subsequent to step S518, a stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates an address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is deleted, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not deleted.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, the checksum is calculated (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM assuming that the payout information is a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (at power-off) described later (step S526). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and a checksum value is stored and held in a payout control built-in RAM in a power supply cut-off process to be described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off processing has been completed normally and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

  When the pay-out backup flag HBK-FLG has the value 1 in step S528, that is, when the processing at the time of power-off of the pay-out control section has been completed normally, the work area of the pay-out control built-in RAM is set as power recovery time (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, power recovery time information is read from a ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and The power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Thereby, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes not only a state where the power is turned on from a state where the power is turned off, but also a state where power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not the value 0 (the value is 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in the step S526, or If the pay-out backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value is 0) in S528, that is, if the power-off process of the payout control unit is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). ). Thereby, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, a work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, interrupt initialization is performed (step S536). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S536, that is, at every 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as a power failure warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S540, it is determined whether the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). The 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 1.75 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is performed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. When 75 ms has not elapsed, each value is set to 0.

  When the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG has the value 0 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and it is determined whether the power failure notice signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the value 1. is set to the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544), and the external watchdog is set. An external WDT clear signal is output to the timer (external WDT) 4120c (turns on, step S546). The external WDT 4120c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped during the clear signal release time. (The system of the payout control MPU 4120a is periodically diagnosed as to whether or not it runs away).

  Subsequent to step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball commands and self-check commands shown in FIG. 117) have been normally received, and a payout motor 744 Various kinds of information such as drive information for controlling the drive to the player, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED display 860c are stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100 or the payout motor 744. The number of balls that the payout motor 744 actually paid out the game balls is output as a prize ball number information signal. Output to the external terminal board 784 (every payout motor 744 actually pays out 10 game balls), or an error LED. For example, a display signal is output to the display 860c.

  Subsequent to step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the error release switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the count switch 751, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, a BRQ signal, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal from the CR unit 6. , A main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 indicating that the main control board 4100 has properly received various commands transmitted in a command transmission process described later, and stores the same in the input information storage area as input information. .

  Subsequent to step S550, a timer update process is performed (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is in a swirling state by the payout rotator 748 shown in FIG. 70, the ball skew determination time set as the determination condition and the payout rotator 748 are set. The skip determination time set when the home position determination is not performed, and the ball removal determination set when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are discharged as shown in FIG. Time, when determining whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is full of stored gaming balls, the fullness determination time set as the determination condition, When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 by the detection signal from the switch 750 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the determination condition is used. In addition to performing time management, such as the set ball-out determination time, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotator 748 and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 The determination condition is set when determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of game balls that are inconsistent due to a mismatch is repeatedly performed. The time of the mismatch counter reset determination time is managed. For example, when the sphere judging time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, every time this timer updating process is performed, the sphere judging time is reduced by 1.75 ms. When the result of the subtraction has a value of 0, the ball determination time is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball out determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time the timer updating process is performed, the ball-pulling out judgment time, the full tank judging time, the ball out judging time, and the mismatch counter reset judging time are decremented by 1.75 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0. , The ball removal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the mismatch counter reset judgment time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in a time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, a CR communication process is performed (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input. Is determined. The payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, and the like stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set. By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, and the like at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or blackout. Accordingly, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power outage while the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is being performed, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or shortage. In other words, in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU 4120a performs an instantaneous blackout or power failure while exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 and paying out the game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery. Is restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage stored as the payout backup information. Exchange of various signals between pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and CR unit 6 immediately before an instantaneous or blackout And it is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls. Thus, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous stop or stop when the power is restored, even if the instantaneous stop or stop occurs. The various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved. Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication processing, upon power recovery, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to a logic state of a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. It outputs to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the I / O port 4120b. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the following formula. Is determined, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, and the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. As an output setting of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when the communication with the CR unit 6 is not being performed, the rental ball is paid. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting. Thus, in the CR communication processing, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. Output to CR unit 6. In this way, for example, immediately before an instantaneous stop, if the awarding ball device 740 dispenses a game ball in an abnormal state, the state is restored when the power is restored, and thus the state is restored. At an early stage, the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. It can be notified that the payout operation of the game balls by the ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. Thus, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery. In the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, in the pachinko gaming machine When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected to each other through the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are used to pay out the lending ball. In order to notify that the dispensing operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the dispensing control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, the pachinko machine. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 86. When the connection is not electrically connected via the, the state of the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible, and the output of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Output from the terminal to the CR unit 6. The state of the logic of the EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or completed is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 4110 A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, a full tank and out of ball check process is performed (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on the input information, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the filled game balls are full, or the number of game balls taken into the supply path 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or more than a predetermined number by the detection signal from the ball out switch 750. Or not. For example, it is determined whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls by using the timer interrupt period 1.75 ms in the current full and ball exhaustion check processing. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON and the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous (1.75 ms before) full tank and out of ball check processing, that is, the detection from the full tank switch 550 When the signal has transitioned from OFF to ON, the timer update processing in step S552 starts measuring the above-described full tank determination time (504 ms). When the full tank determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, it is determined whether the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in the full tank and out of ball check processing. Is determined. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, it is determined that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls, and the full tank information for notifying the state is described above. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, it is determined that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the stored game balls, and full tank information notifying the fact is stored in the state information storage area. I do.

  The determination of whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also performed by using the timer interrupt period 1.75 ms to check whether the game tank is full or not. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on in the processing, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (1.75 ms before) full and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection from the out-of-ball switch 750 When the signal transits from OFF to ON, the timer update processing in step S552 starts measuring the above-mentioned ball-out determination time (119 ms). When the time-out-of-ball determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the time-out-of-ball determination time comes, whether or not the detection signal from the ball out-of-ball switch 750 is ON in this full and ball out-of-ball check process. Is determined. In this determination, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is ON, the out-of-ball information notifying that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is transmitted. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball out switch 750 is OFF while the state is stored in the state information storage area, the fact that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not more than the predetermined number is notified. The ball breaking information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, a command receiving process is performed (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball commands and self-check commands shown in FIG. 117) are received. When the various commands are normally received, payer ACK information notifying the fact is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands cannot be normally received, a connection error that indicates that an error has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (an error has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, a command analysis process is performed (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, main operation setting processing is performed (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, lending balls, removing balls, and watching balls are performed, a retry operation is determined, the number of unpaid balls (award ball stock number) is monitored, and the like. I do.

  Subsequent to step S562, an LED display data creation process is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various kinds of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860c of the payout control board 4110 is created, and the output information storage area is described as LED display information. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, and based on the ball-out information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply path 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not a predetermined number or more, a corresponding display is displayed. Data (in the present embodiment, a display value of 1 (number “1”)) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, a command transmission process is performed (step S566). In this command transmission processing, various kinds of information are read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame) classified into the state display shown in FIG. 119 based on the various kinds of information are read out. State 2 command) and transmit it to the main control board 4100. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on the out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the supply path 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not a predetermined number or more, the frame state 1 command And sends it to the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S566, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 4120c is stopped (turned off, step S568). As a result, the external WDT 4120c is cleared so that the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are not reset. When the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped, the external WDT 4120c starts measuring the clear signal release time.

  Subsequent to step S568, the process returns to step S540 again to determine whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input. If the power failure notice signal has not been input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S542. When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, a value of 0 is set to the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544. In step S546, an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT 4120c, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, timer updating processing is performed in step S552, and CR communication is performed in step S554. Processing is performed, and in step S556, a full tank and out-of-ball check processing are performed. In step S558, a command reception process is performed, a command analysis process is performed in step S560, a main operation setting process is performed in step S562, an LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, and a command transmission process is performed in step S566. In step S568, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 4120c is stopped (OFF), and steps S540 to S568 are repeatedly performed. The processing in steps S540 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received. I have. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a secures a processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure notice signal is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of the payout information is protected. Subsequent to step S570, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, via the payout control I / O port 4120b (step S572). Thus, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 can release the latched state by outputting the power failure clear signal. Subsequent to step S572, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is stopped (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped. Subsequent to step S574, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 4120c, and the output is stopped (ON / OFF, step S576). This clears the external WDT 4120c. After step S576, the checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). This checksum is calculated by assuming that the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, is a numerical value. Subsequent to step S578, the value 1 is set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, the storage of the payout backup information is completed. Subsequent to step S580, prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM is set (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected. Subsequent to step S582, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned on / off to the external WDT 4120c. Therefore, the external WDT 4120c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b to perform reset. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "dispensing control unit power-off processing".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs a power up process of the payout control unit by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the pay-out backup information stored in the pay-out control built-in RAM is normal. Has been inspected. As described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is double-checked to check whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

[14-2. Dispensing control section timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (1.75 ms in the present embodiment) set in the power up processing of the payout control unit shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to prohibition and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, a value of 1 is set to a 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 1.75 elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 1.75 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. The value is set to 0 when 0.75 ms has not elapsed. Subsequent to step S592, switching (restoring) of the register is performed (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed. Subsequent to step S594, interrupt permission is set (step S596), and this routine ends.

[14-3. Ball release switch operation determination processing]
Next, the ball release switch operation determination processing will be described. In the ball release switch operation determination processing, it is determined whether the ball release switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 is operated.

  When the ball release switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the ball release switch 860b is operated as shown in FIG. S600). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the ball release switch 860b in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S600, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b. When the input information includes a detection signal from the ball-stripping switch 860b, it is determined that the ball-stripping switch 860b is being operated. On the other hand, when the input information does not include a detection signal from the switch 860b, it is determined that the switch 860b has not been operated.

  If the switch 860b is operated in step S600, a value of 1 is set in the ball release flag RMV-FLG (step S602). The ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are to be discharged as shown in FIG. When the game ball is not discharged, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S602, the above-described ball-pulling determination time is set to be valid (step S604), and this routine ends. When the ball-pulling-out determination time becomes valid, the ball-pulling-out determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126.

  On the other hand, if the ball release switch 860b has not been operated in step S600, this routine ends. Note that the ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S602 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

[14-4. Rotation angle switch history creation processing]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 98 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. (Step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: the most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, the least significant bit B0, and "B" represent bits). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When the input information includes a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the detection slit 749a for grasping the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. It is determined that the state has changed. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, it is determined that the detection slit 749a has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  If the detection slit 749a has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S614). In the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit 749a is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S618). In the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614 is performed, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S610 is replaced with the most significant bit. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← Least significant bit B0, so that one bit is shifted from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. I do.

  Subsequent to step S618, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and this routine ends.

  As described above, each time the rotation angle switch history creation processing is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit 749a is The value of the least significant bit B0 is determined according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit 749a has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since 1 or 0 is set, a history of the detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[14-5. Sprocket home position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket home position determination skip processing will be described. In the sprocket home position determination skip processing, the determination as to whether or not the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70 is at the home position is skipped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is also performed when the payout of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is completed. Thus, the rotation of the rotating shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state where no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket home position determination skip processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to perform the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748, and has a value of 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed (when skipping). The value is set to 0 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed (when skipping is not performed).

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is equal to 0 (when skipping is not performed) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, the rotation from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is performed. The angular switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the home position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)” In the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits have a value of 0 and lower 4 bits. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST take the value 1, the detection slit 749a is turned on by the rotation slit switch 752 continuously with four timer interrupt cycles. This means that the shaft has transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state. In the occurrence of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 98 is rotating by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 of the rotation detection board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 shown in FIG. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation of the payout rotator 748 is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotator 748 is performed, The history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 129, and the lower four of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST This is performed based on bits B3 to B0, that is, the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 due to the generation of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. . Thus, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 rotates four steps, and thus rotates more than the payout rotating body 748 due to the backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 due to the backlash. can do. Therefore, erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotator 748 due to backlash can be prevented, so that the rotational position of the payout rotator 748 can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt periods are 7 ms (= 1.75 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the home position determination skip flag The value 1 is set to SKP-FLG (step S636). Thus, it is possible to set so that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed (skipped). The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748.

  Subsequent to step S636, the skip determination time is set to be valid (step S638), and this routine ends. Here, as shown in FIG. 71, the number of the detection slits 749a is the same as the number of the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are formed on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board 749 at equal intervals (every 120 degrees). I have. Further, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 of the rotation detecting board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747, as described above. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the respective detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749 (the payout rotating body 748) is designed to correspond to the 18 steps of rotation of the payout motor 744.

  The payout control MPU 4120a manages the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744. More specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit 749a transits the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a blocking state to a non-blocking state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) a detection slit 749a. A state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the interrupted state to the non-interrupted state (referred to as a “fixed position determination state”); And a state that has transited to the state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to four steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 (120 degrees), that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748, is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation. .

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit 749a is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, so that the skip determination time rotates the payout motor 744 by 13 steps. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 1.75 ms, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms (= 1.75 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. Note that the payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S630 (when skipping), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed, or in step S634, If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in S632 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the routine ends as it is. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island equipment are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69, are taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. It is led to. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is in a file environment susceptible to noise. A rotation angle switch 752 is provided on the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, and a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Also, the wiring (harness) connecting the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 in the prize ball case in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is affected by the noise due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-described fixed position determination skipping state (3), that is, the detection slit 749a switches the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In this state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed. Thereby, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is enhanced. Note that, as described above, the cycle and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 can be obtained in advance by calculation, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[14-6. Spherical judgment processing]
Next, the bulging determination processing will be described. In the ball skew determination processing, it is determined whether or not the ball skew state by the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred.

  When the ball displacement determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. The home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)” In the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are used. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S642, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the detection slit 749a rotates. This routine is terminated assuming that the optical axis of the angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the paying-out rotating body 748 is rotating and the ball does not bulge.

  On the other hand, if the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out at step S640 and the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value do not match in step S642, the ball may not move. The value 1 is set to the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is out of the ball due to the payout rotating body 748. The value 1 is set when the payout motor 744 performs the ball in motion, The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

  Subsequent to step S644, the ball judging determination time is set to be valid (step S646), and this routine ends. When the ball watching determination time becomes valid, the ball watching determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. .

[14-7. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes a prize ball stock number addition processing for a prize ball and a prize ball stock number addition processing for a lending ball. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command described later. The process of adding the prize ball stock number for ball rental is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition process for ball rental will be described. In the present embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls is set to be performed with priority, and the prize ball stock number addition processing according to the prize ball stock number added in the prize ball stock number addition processing is performed. After the game balls are paid out by the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, it is set so as to perform the prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental.

[14-7-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 132 (step). S650). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the received command information is read from the received command information storage area to determine whether or not the received command information is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, this routine is ended as it is. If the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the number of prize balls PBV corresponding to the prize ball command is calculated. It is read from the number information table (step S652). The award ball number information table is an information table stored in advance in the payout internal ROM in association with the award ball command and the award ball number PBV, as will be described in detail later.

  Subsequent to step S652, the award ball stock number PBS is read from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls which have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls. ing. Thus, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the winning ball information storage area.

  The award ball number PBV read in step S652 is added to the award ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and this routine ends. After the addition in step S656, the award ball command read in step S650 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[14-7-2. Prize Ball Stock Number Addition Process for Rental Ball]
Next, a description will be given of the prize ball stock number addition processing for a ball rental. When the prize ball stock number adding process for ball rental starts, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether there is a ball loan request signal as shown in FIG. (Step S660). This determination is made based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the input information is read from the input information storage area to determine whether or not there is a ball lending request signal.

  When there is no ball-lending request signal in step S660, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a ball-lending request signal in step S660, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the above-mentioned prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. (Step S662), the number RBV of lending balls is added to the number PBS of winning ball stocks (step S664), and this routine ends. The number RBV of loaned balls is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the ball lending request signal read in step S660 is deleted from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball is prioritized (the prize ball and the lending ball are managed separately), so that the lending ball request signal is held even when there is a lending ball request signal. The payout of the lent ball is performed upon completion of the payout of the prize ball. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of the lending ball is performed after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes zero.

[14-8. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. In this stock monitoring process, is the player continuing to play the game in a state in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state) during the game? This is a monitoring process.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. It is read (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read award ball stock number PBS is equal to or more than the caution threshold value TH (step S672). The caution threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  If the award ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the value 1 is set in the caution flag CA-FLG (step S674), and this routine ends. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking game balls in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid game balls (the number of award ball stocks described above) is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH. , And is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value is equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH, and to a value of 0 when the threshold value is not equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH.

  On the other hand, if the award ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the value of the caution flag CA-FLG is set to 0 (step S676), and this routine ends.

  When the gaming state is a big hit and the player relaxes and looks into the effect developed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 100, the player inadvertently pays out as a prize ball for one round. The played ball may not be removed from the lower plate 302 by operating the lower plate pull button 354 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 becomes full of game balls, and the game balls accumulate in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540. When the accommodating space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or more than the caution threshold value TH. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform the store clerk of the hall that the player is paying attention to the game. Thereby, the clerk of the hall can inform the player that the game ball is to be pulled out from the lower plate 302, and the player fills the lower plate 302 (accommodating space 546 of the fal cover unit 540) with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the cautionary threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to approximately one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall as early as possible to warn the player of the game.

[14-9. Dispensing ball removal judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. This payout ball removal determination setting processing is performed by paying out the game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70, or the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. And a process of setting the game balls stored in the tank rail 731 to be discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1, to perform the ball movement, or not to perform such payout or discharge. .

  When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 rotates the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. The angular switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S680).

  Subsequent to step S680, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 70 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. The home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)” In the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are used. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether or not FLG is the value 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation to be described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and when the retry operation is not abnormal (retry The value is set to 0 when the operation is normal.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not the value 1 (it is the value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally performed, it is determined whether or not the ball in-flight flag PBE-FLG is the value 1 ( Step S686). This flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is out of the ball due to the payout rotating body 748. The value 1 is set when the payout motor 744 performs the ball in motion, The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

  In step S686, when the ball in-flight flag PEB-FLG is not the value 1 (value is 0), that is, when the ball is not performing the ball-moving operation, the prize-ball stock is stored in the prize-ball information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The number PBS is read (step S688), and it is determined whether the read award ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is the number of unpaid balls in the payout of the game balls by the payout motor 744.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is a number of unpaid balls, whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is full of the stored gaming balls. It is determined whether or not it is (step S692). This determination is made based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out of ball check processing in step S556 in the processing at the time of power supply of the payout controller (payout controller main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full information is read from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls.

  If the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full of the stored game balls in step S692, a payout setting process described later is performed (step S694), and this routine ends. In the payout setting process, a payout operation of paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls in step S692, this routine is ended as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored gaming balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (the value is 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is the value 1. (Step S696). The ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731. When discharging the game balls, the value is 1, and the game balls are not discharged. When the value is set to 0, respectively. The determination in step S696 is made based on the determination result in step S600 in the ball release switch operation determination process shown in FIG. In other words, when an operation signal (detection signal) is input from the ball release switch 860b shown in FIG. 98, the value 1 is set to the ball release flag RMV-FLG in step S602 in the ball release switch operation determination processing.

  When the ball-pulling flag RMV-FLG has the value 1 in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are to be discharged, a ball-pulling setting process described later is performed (step S698). This routine ends. In the ball removing setting process, a ball removing operation of discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 is performed.

  As described above, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated after the power is turned on, the ball removal setting process is performed in step S698 of the payout ball removal determination setting process, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are set. Can be discharged. When the discharging is completed, the value 0 is set to the ball-pulling flag RMV-FLG.

  On the other hand, if the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0) in step S696, that is, if the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are not to be discharged, this routine is ended as it is. . Thereby, payout and discharge of the game ball are not performed.

  On the other hand, when the in-sphere flag PBE-FLG has the value 1 in step S686, that is, when the ball is performing the ball-moving operation, a ball-moving operation setting process described later is performed (step S700), and this routine ends. In the ball jumping operation setting process, a ball jumping operation for eliminating the ball jumping state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has the value 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S702). . In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal in the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S702, output of an error state to the CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine ends. In step S704, the payout control MPU 4120a notifies the CR unit 6 that the ball lending cannot be performed at present when the CR unit 6 is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, when the falling edge is held), the logic of the PRDY signal is kept LOW, that is, the falling state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information, and is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read-out PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. I do. On the other hand, during communication with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. When there is a certain (EXS signal is rising and held), the logic HI is maintained.

[14-9-1. Payment setting processing]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In the payout setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 is driven to make settings for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 136 (step S710). The drive command number DRV is for instructing the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the number of drive commands DRV is read from the award ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, it is determined whether the drive command number DRV is a value 0 (step S712). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains based on the drive command number DRV.

  When the number of drive commands DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (stop). Step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal in the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S714, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the winning ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the actual ball count PB is read (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. Although this count will be described in detail later, in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126, the count from the count switch 751 shown in FIG. This is performed based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read from the award ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the winning ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set in the winning ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720). The value 0 is set in the actual ball count PB (step S722), and this routine ends. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the winning ball stock number PBS read out in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not the value 0 in step S712, that is, when there is the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the number of drive commands DRV is subtracted by 1 (decremented, step S726), and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the input information is read from the input information storage area to determine whether or not there is a detection signal from the count switch 751.

  If there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 in step S728, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented in step S730), and this routine ends. In step S730, the actual ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the actual ball count PB.

  On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in step S728, this routine is terminated. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120a is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726, and when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented. It is determined that one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the award ball stock number PBS in the above-described step S720 to the drive command number DRV in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out once again. Accordingly, when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, in other words, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded to the prize ball stock number PBS, so that a retry operation for paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing the retry operation, the possibility that unpaid game balls are not paid out to the player can be extremely reduced, and disadvantages of the player due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[14-9-2. Ball removal setting process]
Next, the ball empty setting process will be described. In the ball removing setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 is driven to perform the ball removing operation shown in FIG. 69 for discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731. It is.

  When the ball-pulling setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball-pulling determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 137 (step S740). This determination is made based on the ball-pull-out determination time updated in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S740, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. Note that the payout motor 744 performs a ball removal operation during the ball removal determination time. In this ball removing operation, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are discharged.

  If the ball-pulling determination time has not elapsed in step S740, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to perform the ball-pulling operation (step S742), and this routine ends. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the ball-pulling determination time has elapsed in step S740, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to end the ball-pulling operation (step S744). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S744, a value of 0 is set to the throwing flag RMV-FLG (step S746), and this routine ends. As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are to be discharged. When the game ball is not discharged, the value is set to 0.

[14-9-3. Ball movement setting processing]
Next, the ball movement setting process will be described. This ball movement setting process is a process for performing a setting to eliminate the ball movement state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG.

  When the ball movement setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the ball movement determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. S750). This determination is made based on the ball judging time subtracted in the timer updating process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. More specifically, the ball skew determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball determination time has elapsed.

  If the ball displacement determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752).

  Subsequent to step S752, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value. The home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)” In the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are used. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S754, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the ball fluttering operation is performed. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to be performed (step S756), and this routine ends. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout motor 744 The stop of the drive signal to is set (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, a value 0 is set to the flag PBE-FLG during the ball-projecting operation as an end of the ball-projecting operation (step S760), and this routine ends. This flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is displaced by the payout rotator 748. When the only movement is not performed (the end of the ball movement), each value is set to 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball-skipping determination time has elapsed in step S750, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, an error state output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the communication when the CR unit 6 is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is kept LOW, that is, the fall state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. I do. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read-out PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. I do. On the other hand, during communication with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means, as described above, that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. Is HI (the EXS signal is rising and held), the logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, a value 0 is set in the ball in-flight flag PBE-FLG as an end of the ball inflection operation (step S766), and this routine ends.

[14-10. Retry operation monitoring processing]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether the retry operation of paying out the game balls to be paid out again is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. The fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has the value 0, and the lower four bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination of step S772, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the mismatch counter INCC is set. The value 1 is added (increment, step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotator 748 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 shown in FIG. Since the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotator 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 usually match each other, It becomes 0. The payout control MPU 4120a performs the retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 136. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not payout of inconsistent game balls due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 and the game balls is repeated. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area is incremented.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value. At this time, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 (step S776). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S780 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the count switch 751.

  If there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the value is decremented by 1 from the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decremented, step S778).

  Subsequent to step S778, or when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that is inconsistent due to the retry operation is dispensed is about one-hundredth of a million. The value 5 is set as the threshold INCTH. In the process of setting the work area of the internal payout control RAM in step S530 in the process of turning on the power supply of the payout control unit in FIG. 126, as described above, this is the payout backup information stored in the internal payout control RAM when the power is restored. Based on the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area, information used for the retry operation monitoring processing is set. By this processing, for example, even if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination in step S780, the monitoring of the payout operation (retry operation) of the game balls by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage, can be continued from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before an instantaneous power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the prize ball. It is determined that the payout operation of the game balls by the device 740 is in a normal state, and it is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state even in the power recovery, by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. It is determined that the state is the state, and even at the time of power restoration, it is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state by the determination in step S780.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCH, it is determined that a "retry error" has occurred. In order to notify, the retry error information for displaying the number “5” is set on the error LED display 860c which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, and the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM Is set (stored) (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to a mismatch counter INCC stored in the winning ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, Initialization is performed when this internal factor occurs. When the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 is operated, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when this external factor occurs. I have. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, Is output to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. This allows the RAM clear notification sound to flow from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. It has become.

  Subsequent to step S784, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG (step S786), and this routine ends. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally performed. The value is set to 0 during normal operation.

  The payout control MPU 4120a uses the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created in the command transmission process in step S566 and transmitted to the main control board 4100, and display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860c is created in the LED display data creation process in step S564 in the same process. The drive signal is stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860c based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output processing in step S548 in the same processing. The number "5" is displayed on the LED display 860c. The main control board 4100 having received the status command transmits the state command to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100, a door frame side lighting blinking command for outputting a lighting signal to cause a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red) to emit light is provided. And outputs a plurality of LEDs in a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk of the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 so that the error LED display 860c mounted on the payout control board 4110 displays the number “ By visually checking that "5" is displayed, it can be confirmed that a "retry error" has occurred. In this way, the clerk of the hall or the like checks the malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the dispensing control board 4110, and poor contact of the various connectors in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence. This can be performed very quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED display 860c are not notified.

  Also, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 751, the above-described retry operation is forcibly generated as the game ball received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to detect, and Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, if the value of the above-mentioned inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold value INCH, the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 will be described. The plurality of LEDs emit light, so that a clerk in the hall or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the player who commits the wrongdoing has to stop so that the wrongdoing is not found, and cannot continuously obtain the illegal game ball due to the wrongdoing. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player performing the misconduct is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, five balls Therefore, damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the count switch 751 can be extremely small.

  Further, as described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, as described above, Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor that has occurred. Thus, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor occurs, for example, when the error cancel switch 860a illustrated in FIG. 98 is operated. Therefore, even if the error release switch 860a or the like is tampered with incorrectly and its operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an illegal act. There is no.

[14-11. Mismatch counter reset determination processing]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In the inconsistency counter reset process, the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotator 748 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 shown in FIG. This is a process of determining whether to reset the calculated inconsistency counter INCC.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 140 ( Step S790). This determination is made based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, this routine ends as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the mismatch counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to the initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours).

  Subsequent to step S792, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM (step S794), and this routine ends. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751. Since the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 are usually the same, the value 0 Become. The payout control MPU 4120a performs the retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 136. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not payout of inconsistent game balls due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 and the game balls is repeated. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that is inconsistent due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth. Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of the game board 4 and a frame such as the main body frame 3 on which the game board 4 is mounted, and by exchanging the game board 4 (replacement of a new machine). Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 and the drive power supply for the prize ball device 740 and the control power supply for the payout control board 4110 are generated as shown in FIG. Are provided on the frame side as a common function. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 can determine the abnormal operation as to whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC. In the power-off processing of the payout control unit in the power-on processing of the payout control unit shown in FIG. 126, the mismatch counter INCC immediately before the power-off is stored when the power is turned off, while the power supply of the payout control unit shown in FIG. 125 is turned on. In the processing of step S530 in the time processing (setting when the power is restored in the RAM work area), the processing is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on. Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 4 mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is replaced with a game board 4 ′ of another game specification different from the game board 4 and the power is turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the board 4110 starts the process again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the gaming board 4 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the gaming board 4 'is mounted, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the gaming board 4 before replacement is mounted is inherited as it is. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the gaming board 4 'is mounted, and the number of game balls inconsistently occurs with a probability of one millionth by chance and the mismatch counter INCC When the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the above-described mismatch threshold INCH, the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the retry operation is abnormal in a short period of time after replacing the gaming board 4 with the gaming board 4 '. May be present. That is, in a short period of time since the game board 4 was replaced with the game board 4 ', a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. There is a possibility that the retry operation may be suddenly determined as an abnormal operation even though the error has not occurred. As described above, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′ and the retry operation is determined as an abnormal operation in a short period of time, an impression that the replaced game board 4 ′ is apt to break down despite being new. May be given to players. The probability that a game ball that does not match itself by a retry operation is paid out by one millionth of a million balls is determined by installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention in a hall and operating it continuously for one week during the business hours of the hall. In this case, the probability that one game ball inconsistent due to the retry operation is paid out is the same as that of the game ball. Therefore, in the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. With a probability of 1, a state in which only the value 1 is not subtracted occurs. Then, in one week, the value 1 is incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes a value 1. In two weeks, the value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes a value 2 and 3 In the week, the value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC and the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 3, and in 4 weeks, the value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC and the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 4 in 5 weeks. The value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, when five weeks have elapsed, since the mismatch counter INCC matches the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control MPU 4120a determines in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that a malfunction of the count switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the count switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like have occurred. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 139, the error LED display 860c, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, displays a numeral " Set retry error information to display "5" in payout control So that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM.

  Therefore, when determining that the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the mismatch counter reset determination processing, the payout control MPU 4120a repeats the mismatch counter reset every 7000 s (about 2 hours). By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting the value, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC which is generated at a probability of 1 / million is performed. Disabled. This indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation even though there is no failure of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Incidentally, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 751, the above-mentioned retry operation is forcibly generated as it is difficult to detect the paid-out game ball received by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and As described above, if the count switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short period of time even if a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, as described above, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes When the mismatch threshold value INCH or more is reached, a plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that a clerk at the hall or the like runs to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the player who commits the wrongdoing has to stop so that the wrongdoing is not found, and cannot continuously obtain the illegal game ball due to the wrongdoing. On the other hand, when the count switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold INCH, the mismatch counter INCC is reset every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although reset, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the cheating player during this time is, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, and the count switch 751 Even if the state is repeatedly inoperative for a long time, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player who commits the wrongdoing can be extremely reduced.

[14-12. Error release switch operation determination processing]
Next, the error release switch operation determination processing will be described. In this error release switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 98 has been operated.

  When the error release switch operation determination processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the error release switch 860a is operated, as shown in FIG. S800). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the error release switch 860a. When the input information includes a detection signal from the error release switch 860a, it is determined that the error release switch 860a has been operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the input information, it is determined that the error release switch 860a has not been operated.

  If the error release switch 860a has not been operated in step S800, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the error release switch 860a has been operated in step S800, an error flag state confirmation process is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination processing, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information related to the award ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is confirmed. For example, the status of a retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is abnormal is checked. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (retry operation is normal), respectively. Since this is set, the payout control MPU 4120a confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1.

  Subsequent to step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag is replaced with the state information described above. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126, various types of information (status information) are read from the status information storage area, and the read status information is read. , And sends the status command to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormal has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, it is determined that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the process of powering on the payout control unit (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126, A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 123, and the peripheral control board 4140 A retry operation error notification process for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation is performed. In this retry operation error notification processing, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of “Please check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” Is performed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, , 2 times). By flowing from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. It informs clerks in the hall. The clerk of the hall who heard the notification of the error notification of the retry operation may find that the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 70, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the dispensing control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. Can be confirmed very quickly as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. In the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment).

  Subsequent to step S804, a release setting process is performed (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is corresponded to the error flag. The CR unit 6 informs that the error LED display 860c, which is a segment display already mounted on the payout control board 4110, forcibly stops the content or that the ball can be lent. 98, the logic of the above-mentioned PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, a state in which the logic is started, and a connection terminal board for a rental device such as a game ball from a payout control I / O port 4120b of a payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormal is a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the error LED indicator 860c has already displayed the error. The retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is set to “normal” in order to forcibly stop the number “5” that notifies that the “retry error” is present. Forcibly overwrite the information displayed with the graphic "-" notifying the effect. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is possible, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the lending device connection such as a game ball is connected from the payout control I / O port 4120b. The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, error flag initialization processing is performed (step S808), and this routine ends. In the error flag initialization process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is reset. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the above-described retry operation is abnormally operating is a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 139, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined by the internal factor. Is generated, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in the process of step S786 of the same process, and when the error release switch 860a is operated, this triggers, that is, this external factor Is generated, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value 0 and initialized. It should be noted that the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined by operating the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97, that is, when the error release switch 860a is operated. Similarly, initialization is performed when this external factor occurs.

[14-13. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 126 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication processing, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing at the time of the payout operation by ball lending will be described, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money is performed twice) is set as the number of balls to be lent. The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 will be described. The BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are input information read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and are stored in the read input information. Confirms the logic states of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 1.75 ms, which is the interrupt timer cycle.

[14-13-1. Signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read out PRDY signal output setting information pays out the lending ball. 142 is set to the state of the logic of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible. Is transmitted from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 as a HI, that is, the logic of the PRDY signal is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120. Output to the CR unit 6 (timing H0). In this state, when the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed by the player, for example, the ball lending switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending switch 365b is turned on. An operation signal is input to the CR unit 6 as a TDS shown in FIG. 99 from the frequency display board 365 via the connection terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the CR unit 6 to which the TDS is input pays out the number of game balls worth 200 yen as the amount of money to be paid to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of balls to be lent. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal has been input is set to a lending request monitoring time HA (from 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms in the present embodiment) from timing H1. ) Elapses, a predetermined number of balls to be lent by one payout operation from the CR unit 6 via the game ball renting device connection terminal plate 869 (in the present embodiment, 25 balls, an amount of 100 yen) It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out, rises.

  The CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of balls to be rented. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal board 869 until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (c), when the BRQ signal rises before the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (in the present embodiment, In order to notify that one payout operation has started before the elapse of 20 ms ± 1 ms), the payout control I is performed by setting the logic of the EXS signal to HI, that is, keeping the activated state. It is output from the / O port 4120b, and is output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the CR unit 6 to which the EXS has been input is from the timing H3 until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) elapses. The BRQ started and held at timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal board 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 142 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set) from the timing H4. Then, a predetermined number of balls to be lent, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of balls to be lent. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output with the logic of LOW, that is, held down, and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b and EXS. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  The CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls for the remaining 100 yen out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of balls to be rented. ), The BRQ is transmitted from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate before the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum request time is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. The signal is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  When the payout control MPU 4120a similarly pays out the number of game balls of the remaining 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the lending ball number using the above-described method, as shown in FIG. 142 (c). The EXS signal, which has been raised and held, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while its logic is kept LOW, that is, in the fall state, and is sent as EXS via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal board 869. Output to the CR unit 6 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 142A, the CR unit 6 starts from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H7. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H8).

  The above-described loan request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, loan instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit loan completion monitoring time HF are shown in FIG. The time is measured in the timer update process of step S552 in the process at the time of powering on the unit (main process of the payout control unit).

  It should be noted that the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 when the ball has run out, the ball is out, the counting switch error, the retry error, the tank is full, etc. (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6). 142 is LOW, that is, when the falling edge is held), as shown in FIG. 142 (d), the logic of the PRDY signal which is raised and held from the timing H1 is changed to LOW, that is, the falling state. The data is held and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game device or other rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communication is being performed with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), the EXS signal is maintained in a logic state (not shown) and the payout is performed. It is output from the control I / O port 4120b, and is output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869. "Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( When the EXS signal is rising and held), the logic HI is maintained.

  As described above, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a sets the number of game balls of 200 yen as a monetary value to 100 as a monetary value. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for two times twice, game balls with 50 balls to be lent are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A clerk of the hall operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 and, for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money, the upper plate 301, When set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a single payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a money amount, and sets the number of game balls for 500 yen as a money amount as a lending ball number. In the case of setting to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount five times, and calculates the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount. When the number of balls to be loaned is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a money amount ten times.

[14-13-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 allows the CR unit 6 to transmit the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869 even if the above-described rental request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Even if the signal is not output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not activated, or even if the above-described lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 connects the BRDY to the lending device connection device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even if the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal board 869 and the signal has not fallen or the above-described next request confirmation timing HE has elapsed. The signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is not started up. Even if the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF elapses, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869, and the signal falls. If not, it checks whether or not BRQ and BRDY are normal using PRDY and EXS described above. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 142 (e) and (f), when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), the payout control MPU 4120a performs a predetermined period JA (in the present embodiment, from this timing J0). , 200 ms ± 1 ms). After the lapse of the PRDY signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the falling state is maintained and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and PRDY is output. The EXS signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the EXS signal is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while being held down, and EXS Is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J1).

  Subsequently, after a lapse of a predetermined period JB (set to 200 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J1, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal dropped from the timing J1 and held as HI. In other words, the state is kept up and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J2).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal, which has been raised and held from the timing J2 to the logic LOW, after a lapse of a predetermined period JC (in the present embodiment, set to 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J2. That is, it is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while being kept in the lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3).

  Subsequently, after a lapse of a predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J3, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal dropped from the timing J3 and held as HI. In other words, the state is kept up and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J4).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal, which has been raised and held from the timing J4 to the logic LOW, after a lapse of a predetermined period JE (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J4. That is, it is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while being held down, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5).

  Subsequently, after a lapse of a predetermined period JF (set to 10000 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J5, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal dropped from the timing J5 and held as HI. In other words, it is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while being kept in the activated state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6).

  The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are measured by the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) illustrated in FIG. 126.

[15. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 148. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 145 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, and FIG. 148 is a rotation detection switch history creation processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the above.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control section 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control section 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control section 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process, and the rotation detection. The switch history creation processing will be described. The rotation detection switch history creation processing is executed as one processing of the operation unit information acquisition processing in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later. In this embodiment, as the priority of the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set highest, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[15-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 143. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). This initialization processing includes processing for initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, determination processing for hot start / cold start, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 4100 in, for example, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, as shown in FIGS. 118 and 119. In this state, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101, the effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in the bank, is compared, and the effect backup information, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). 1 ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) with respect to Bank 0 (1 fr), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect backup information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) with respect to Bank0 (1 ms), are copied back to make a hot start. When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. To start cold.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information, which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db also in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM). When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), for Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (ie, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A cold start is performed by forcibly writing 0. Subsequent to such a hot start or a cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 100, and resets the peripheral control MPU 4150a. So that they do n’t

  Subsequent to step S1000, current time information acquisition processing is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in (1), the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and controls the liquid crystal display so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information becomes the same. A process of adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the device 1900 to turn on the light is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. And the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the backlight is turned on, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is used. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on at a luminance of 80%, the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not performed. Has become. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done. In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, a value 0 is set to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and is 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value of this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1006, it is determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. After determining whether or not this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and peripheral control external WDT 4150e to reset peripheral control MPU 4150a. So that they do n’t

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process to be described later is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, a lamp data output process is performed (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Here, the serial I / O port for lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the lamp driving board serial I / O port is started, the transmission data storage area 4150caa of the lamp driving board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state of being set. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 designates the transmission of the lamp driving board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the data in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first one byte of the game board side emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to and write to the transmission buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side for 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the lamp driving board serial I / O port is generated, triggers the transmission interrupt request (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the lamp driving board serial I / O port transmission buffer register). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the data is emptied. This causes the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa to use the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150caa is stored in the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai one byte at a time. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the ramp data output process, a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Here, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When this serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is created and set in the creation process. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of the 4150cab is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer register of the I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port every time a transmission interrupt request occurs (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad in units of 1 byte. , And frame decoration via the peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration driving amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, an operation unit monitoring process is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Of the dial operating unit 401 (for example, the rotation direction (rotation direction) created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). ) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 in which the history information and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 are set) The operation of the dial unit 405 is monitored, and the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is monitored. And it reflects the state of operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects whether appropriately determined.

  Subsequent to step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated in the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process described later is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Thus, various screens are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the display data output process, when drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is canceled. Has become. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. However, although a so-called dropped frame occurs, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 53 are provided on the speaker 821 and the door frame 5 provided on the main body frame 3 by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to synchronizing with the effects from the speakers 130, 222, and 262, such as music, sound effects, and the like, in accordance with various effects.

  Subsequent to step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in sound data creation processing to be described later is output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and music and sound effects are output. In addition, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound are output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the built-in sound source VDP 4160a is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c sends the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 reproduce music and sound effects and the like in accordance with various effects in stereo, and also provide a notification sound and an announcement sound in stereo. Or played.

  Subsequent to step S1018, scheduler update processing is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number of screen data from the top screen data is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number of emission data from the first emission data is changed to the emission of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to use the mode.

  In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are specified. The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the sound command data from the first sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a among the sound command data.

  In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the first drive data The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, a received command analysis process is performed (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101. Then, various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac are analyzed. As the various commands, various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, various commands classified into big hit related, and power-on shown in FIG. 118 are classified. Commands, various commands classified in the ordinary figure synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the ordinary electric role production-related, various commands classified in the notification display shown in FIG. 119, and classified into the status display. There are various commands, various commands related to the test, and various other commands.

  Following step S1022, a warning process is performed (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 include various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 119, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The set schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, schedule data for electric drive source, and the like are stored in various control data of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. It is extracted from the copy area 4150ce and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priorities registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transferred. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred because another anomaly has occurred after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Subsequent to step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which is obtained in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month which is calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, a lamp data creation process is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and based on the emission data indicated by the pointer, out of the emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the emission mode generation schedule data. A game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. In addition to extracting and creating from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, it is set in the transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Multiple decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 shown The door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the LED is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. Then, it is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is changed from the screen data indicated by the pointer to the peripheral control unit out of the time-series screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control RAM 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and among the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound instruction data indicated by the pointer is It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to thereby control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number. In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 101 is activated each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob 4140a is converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 are controlled so as to have the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is converted into the audio data as the audio data serialized by the sound data output processing in step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects are played from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from the silence to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and the sound source of the sound control unit 4160. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even when the clerk of the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speakers 821 provided on the main frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 are provided. , 262, the effect sound such as music and sound effect is reduced, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is performing wrongdoing, a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume is set). ) Can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraud due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while That the screen played on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful in addition to the music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, or that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous gaming state for the player. You can also. In addition, a period in which the jackpot game state is generated by operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 (for example, when a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds is set as the jackpot game state, The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted within each round of 1 to 15 rounds. In the present embodiment, music is played from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 during execution of the big hit game state. A player who feels uncomfortable can adjust the volume to a small level to comfortably digest the big hit game state, and a player who wants to digest the big hit game state with a powerful volume can adjust the volume large to comfortably digest the big hit game state You can do it. The sub-volume value of the effect sound adjusted in the big hit game state is such that after the big hit game state is consumed, the sub-volume value is maintained and the effect proceeds. In this program, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and converts the converted value to The value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400. In addition, when a state in which no game is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, and when the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) in a customer waiting state, The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted (that is, the effect sound is produced). The sub-volume value is set as a default value (initial value) to the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a.) In the present embodiment, when a demonstration is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 continuously for a predetermined number of times in the customer waiting state, the volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game is adjusted. Is canceled and the volume is initialized. However, even if the game ball is inserted into various winning ports during the game and the game is not progressing, In order to prevent the volume adjusted by the player from being initialized, the volume adjusted by the player is initialized when a predetermined number of demonstrations are continuously performed.

  Subsequent to step S1032, backup processing is performed (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is set to be backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as effect backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1) in the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to r) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as a request factor of MA controller 4150ac to copy to Bank2 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) is designated as Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the head address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in the Bank0 (1fr) to the Bank2 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (1fr). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), and the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. And the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and the copy to the Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously provided in units of the backup second area 4150cc Bank4 (1fr). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  In the backup processing, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is to be backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 101, that is, every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. The effect control information (SRAM), which is the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM), is used as the effect backup information (SRAM), and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is transferred to the Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db at high speed. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of the Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150a Specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM). From the contents to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), all are copied sequentially from the head address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), and the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. And the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa transfers the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) to the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The backup second area 4150dc is continuously designated by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, a value 0 is set in the normal processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit normal processing (step S1038), and the process returns to step S1006 again to set the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0. Is set and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeatedly performed until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”. The peripheral control unit steady processing starts by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and starts the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010. .., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the processing is completed. Will be done. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed as a trigger. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control part steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The value is set to 0 when the part steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed by the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit regular processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. In step S1009 of the time process (peripheral control unit steady process), the value of the steady process flag SP-FLG is set to 1 to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. In addition to transmitting the signal to the signal interruption process, the peripheral control unit performs the regular process by setting the value 0 to the steady process flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process) of FIG. The completion is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, and the routine processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. That is, it is determined whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. . In other words, this is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady process cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called process failure.

  As a result, in the present peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit regular process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is performed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 143 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution frequency STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times until. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is used as the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times in step S1100, 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process in the process of turning on the peripheral control unit in FIG. 143. The number of times the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit as this routine is executed is increased by one time.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are arranged in chronological order. Among the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 and the motor driving board 4180 shown in FIG. And updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and updates the pointer each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When serial transmission of serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is read. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in chronological order. The motor control data STM-DAT for outputting the door-side motor is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf for decorative driving amplifier board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores frame transmission drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the head address of the area 4150caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. To the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port occurs, triggers it (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller in units of 1 byte. 4150ad, and via the peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 based on drive data designated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral controller 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is created. Peripheral control RAM 4 shown in 101 Set to 50c of the motor driving the substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first byte of the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the serial drive I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port occurs, triggers it (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port transmission buffer register). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the data is emptied. This causes the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa to use the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.), and set them in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. For example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like are created, and the operation of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in the unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, backup processing is performed (step S1110), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time it is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, as the effect backup information (1 ms), Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated as a request factor of the MA controller 4150ac to copy to the Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1ms) is designated as Bank0 (1ms). The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to the bank 2 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (1ms). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), and the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). And the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank0 (1ms) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and the copy to the Bank2 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc. I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), backup bytes (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc are continuously provided in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 143, the various processes related to the effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are performed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the peripheral control unit is started again at step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process by the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production. In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted. In some cases, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100, when transmission of various commands from the main control board 4100 is started as serial data, triggers main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated in response to the fetching, and peripheral command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 146 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received.

  If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main serial data transmitted from main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data is set. When the value is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, after the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. It is under a file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 4150 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 4100. Has been determined. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has changed to non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  If it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data correspond to the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The received command storage area 4150 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are different from the received command storage area. 4150 cac is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the second status of the main serial data as the second byte of the main serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. And the associated mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the one-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period exceeds the period in which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from main control board 4100 can be received. In some cases, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing shown in FIG. 102 and executed when the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110b is input via the main control board 4100 will be described. I do. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300), and receives the power failure notice signal. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1302). If the power failure notice signal has not been input in this determination, this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  If the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off, the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 4 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. Thus, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, a stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, at least a period of 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the command being transmitted. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are designated as the request factors of the control DMA controller 4150ac to be copied to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU. The core 4150aa transfers the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the Bank2 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Is specified in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the contents up to the specified contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc, and the peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the contents stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all of the received command storage areas included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc are successively copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in succession.

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In the WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 100 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure notice signal is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, while the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 143 is started again.

  As described above, in the case where the input of the power failure notification signal continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset immediately before the power failure occurs. It has become. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is canceled without continuing in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312 and the WDT clear processing is not performed, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically returning from reset.

[15-1-6. Rotation detection switch history creation processing]
Next, the rotation detection switch history creation processing executed as one processing of the operation unit information acquisition processing in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 145 will be described. In the rotation detection switch history creation processing, the history of the detection signals from the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG. 43 is created.

  When the rotation detection switch history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the RAM 4150c (step S1400). Each of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST is one byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, and "B" are bits). The history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, and the rotation detection switch 432b Is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST.

  Subsequent to step S1400, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b (step S1402). This determination is made, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, of the plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged at regular intervals on the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG. While one rotation detecting piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detecting switch 432a has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, if there is no detection signal from the rotation detecting switch 432a, the one rotation detecting piece rotates. It is determined that the optical axis of the detection switch 432a has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, one rotation detection piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, while the rotation detection switch 432b When there is no detection signal of, it is determined that one rotation detecting piece has transited the optical axis of the rotation detecting switch 432b from the blocking state to the non-blocking state.

  If there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a in step S1402, or if there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1404). In the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST read out in step S1400 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5. , B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← Least significant bit B0, etc., while shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, while the rotation detection switch 432b , The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400 is stored in the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1. , B1 ← Least significant bit B0, and so on, from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B Shifted by one bit towards the.

  If the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1404, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If the shift has been made, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1406), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a in step S1402, or if there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1408). In the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information in step S1404 is performed. When there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection read out in step S1400 is performed. The switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is stored as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← Least significant bit B0, and so on. From the rotation detection switch 432b while there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read out in step S1400 is converted into the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B ← B1, B1 ← and so that the least significant bit B0, shifted by one bit toward the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  If the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1408, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, and the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If the shift has been made, a value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1410), and this routine ends.

  In this manner, every time the rotation detection switch history creation processing is executed, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. , The value 1 or the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0, so that the history of the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can be created.

  Next, based on the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST described above, whether the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state (in other words, a state in which the dial drive motor 414 is out of step). ), And a method of determining whether it is rotating clockwise or counterclockwise will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotary operation unit, and FIG. 150 is a dial operation unit in the rotary operation unit. FIG. 151A is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of FIG. 151A. FIG. 151 (B) is a list showing ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit. is there.

  As described above, each of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST has one byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, " B "indicates a bit.) The peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 as the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is used as the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c stores the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST. It is remembered. Therefore, the dial operating unit 401 is in a stopped state (in other words, a state in which the dial drive motor 414 is out of synchronization), a state in which the dial driving motor 414 is rotating clockwise, or a state in which When it is determined whether the rotation is in the direction, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are read out from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and whether they match the detection determination value. It depends on whether or not. This detection determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 100, and is copied to the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Are read and used. The data set in advance as the detection determination value is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)”, B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits have a value of 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits have a value of 1. ing. That is, this determination is made based on whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the detection determination value.

  Specifically, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST take the value 1, the rotation detection switch 432a is turned on by the dial operation unit 401 continuously after the occurrence of four 1 ms timer interrupts. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST have a value of 1, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the driven gear 410 has been detected. This means that the rotation detection switch 432b has detected the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401 following the occurrence of the timer interrupt.

  Next, detection of the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. In FIGS. 149 to 151, the rotation detection switch 432a is described as “A”, and the rotation detection switch 432b is described as “B”. Steps 1 to 4 shown below are four types of rotational positions of the dial operation unit 401 with reference to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, respectively. , Step 2, Step 3, and Step 4 are sequentially performed, and after returning to Step 4, returning to Step 1 again.

  When the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, as shown in FIG. 149, in step 1, the rotation detection switches 432 a and 432 b detect the rotation detection piece 410 c of the driven gear 410, and thereafter, the dial operation unit 401 By the shift to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b, and the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation. The process proceeds to a step in which the piece 410c is not detected. Thereafter, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise to step 3, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 is moved to each of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are rotated. The process proceeds to a step in which 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c, The process proceeds to a step in which the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 150, in step 1, both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and thereafter, The shift to step 2 accompanying the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction causes the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 to move to the rotation detection switch 432a, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The process proceeds to a step in which the detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c. Thereafter, the shift to step 3 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401 causes the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 to move to each of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect rotation. The process proceeds to a step in which the piece 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b. Then, the process proceeds to a step in which the rotation detection switch 432b does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned ON (the rotation detection piece 410c is detected) / OFF (no rotation detection piece 410c is detected) in FIG. 151 (A). As shown in (1), the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both "ON" in step 1, and the rotation detection switch 432a is kept "ON" in step 2, while the rotation detection switch 432b is turned "OFF". Then, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned "OFF" in step 3, the rotation detection switch 432a is kept "OFF" in step 4, and the rotation detection switch 432b is turned "ON". Thereafter, the flow returns to step 1 again, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  On the other hand, the ON / OFF operation of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction is performed by turning both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b in step 1 as shown in FIG. ON ", and in step 2, the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be" ON ", while the rotation detection switch 432a is" OFF ". Then, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned "OFF" in Step 3, the rotation detection switch 432b is kept "OFF" in Step 4 while the rotation detection switch 432a is turned "ON". Thereafter, the flow returns to step 1 again, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  When the dial operating unit 401 is not rotating clockwise or counterclockwise and stopped, the detection from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b does not change, so that the rotation detection switches in steps 1 to 4 are not changed. Switching between ON / OFF operations by 432a and 432b is completely eliminated.

  As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 based on ON / OFF in each of the above-described steps 1 to 4. When the dial operation unit 401 is operated by a player's operation, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated by detecting ON / OFF switching of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. The direction of rotation can be grasped, and it can be grasped that the dial operating unit 401 is in a stopped state by detecting that the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b is not switched at all. Can be.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the dial operating unit 401 by rotating the dial operating unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise while the player presses the dial operating unit 401 with a finger or palm. When the rotation of the dial 401 is forcibly stopped, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by detecting that there is no switching between the ON / OFF states of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. It can be understood that the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, is out of step.

[16. Direction]
Next, an effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be briefly described. The effect displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed by the peripheral control unit regular processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 143. FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect, and FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuation of the effect of FIG. 154. A first special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 95 or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 95 Becomes "big hit", in this embodiment, a big hit gaming state occurs in which the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95 is 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds. It has become. In each round, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 7 balls), the round is completed. Each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  The first special lottery result selected by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101 or the second special lottery result selected by receiving game balls into the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 95 is the main control board. By controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 based on the command from the 4100, as shown in FIG. Is a decorative symbol 1900a, a decorative symbol 1900b is in the center, and a decorative symbol 1900c is displayed on the right side, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and the first special lottery result or the first special lottery result is displayed. The two special lottery results can be recognized by the player (the upper special symbol table in the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 95). You can also check the first special lottery result or the second special drawing result in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed in vessel 1185 or under special symbol display device 1186). The decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c are translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized. The decorative symbol 1900c is displayed in a variably manner as if the reels are rotating from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area.

  When the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a and 1900c is stopped at the same decorative symbol, and when reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 154 (b). 41, a message MGA indicating that "press the pressing operation unit continuously to pull the jackpot!" Is displayed at the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Is displayed at the lower center of the display area. Upon seeing the message MGA, the player performs an operation of repeatedly hitting the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. Then, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), a message MGB notifying that “press the operation part a little more to the big hit!” Is displayed at the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and as shown in FIG. A button switch BTN imitating the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is displayed at the lower center of the display area. Upon seeing the message MGB, the player performs an operation of further hitting the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  When the variation display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is stopped and the combination of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c stopped and displayed becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. A message MGC indicating that there is a message is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the probability of the result of the combination that is a big hit is set to a high probability (high probability) set higher than the normal time (low probability). 41, a message MGD notifying that "operate the pressing operation unit and aim for promiscuous promotion!" Is displayed in the center of the display area, and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. A button switch BTN simulating 405 is displayed at the lower center of the display area. Upon seeing the message MGD, the player performs an operation of pressing the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. In this effect, by causing the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the probability of a big hit can be changed to a high probability (at the time of probable change) which is set higher than at the normal time (low probability). This is done to give an opportunity to a player.

  Subsequently, when the jackpot game state is started, a message MGE indicating the number of the round is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Has become. Then, when the ninth round is started as the round progresses, as shown in FIG. 155 (e), a message MGE indicating that the ninth round is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. 155 (d), a message MGF notifying that a promotion of a “promotion chance” is performed if the player cannot be promoted to a certain degree by pressing the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. Is displayed slightly above the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a message MGD is displayed again in the center of the display area, indicating that "operate the pressing operation unit and aim for probable change and promotion!" A button switch BTN imitating the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is displayed at the lower center of the display area. The effect of this promotion chance is to change the probability of a big hit to a high probability (at the time of probable change) higher than the normal time (low probability) by causing the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. This is done in order to give the player another chance to do so.

  Note that the main control board 4100 determines whether the first special lottery result obtained by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101 or the second special lottery result obtained by receiving game balls into the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. Since it is already determined whether or not to generate the probability variation based on the special lottery result, and the result is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140, the player actually presses the operation unit 400 of the operation unit 400. The probability fluctuation does not occur by the operation of 405. Further, even if the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 knows that the command from the main control board 4100 has decided to generate the probability variation, the peripheral control unit 4150 intentionally sets the combination of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900b to be stopped and displayed. 155 (d) and (e) are executed by displaying the combinations that do not cause the probability variation, and the probability variation is triggered by having the player press the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. Control is performed as if the device were activated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect that the player actively presses the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is frequently used, so that the piezoelectric element 425 illustrated in FIG. The capacitor WAC0 is charged. As a result, even if a power outage occurs (the pachinko hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed is a power outage due to an electrical trouble or a power outage due to an emergency in the event of a disaster) and the pachinko hall is completely dark, Since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 emit light due to the voltage charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed adjacent to the pachinko island facility. , And the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes an emergency light, which can be used as a mark for the player to evacuate out of the concourse or the pachinko hall. In other words, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can function as landmarks for evacuating a player to a concourse or a pachinko hall by emitting an emergency light during a power outage. I have.

  In addition, when the player merely enjoys operating the pressing operation unit 405 while playing a game, the power failure (the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed may cause a power failure due to an electrical trouble or an emergency in which a disaster occurs). When the pachinko hall becomes completely dark due to the occurrence of a power outage, electric power for causing the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to emit light as an emergency light in the event of a power outage can be generated and charged to the electrolytic capacitor WAC0. Therefore, although the player himself does not notice, it contributes to evacuating other players to the outside of the concourse or pachinko hall.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above includes the main control board 4100 in FIG. 97, the peripheral control board 4140 in FIG. 100, and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 in FIG. The main control board 4100 controls the progress of the game. The peripheral control board 4140 causes the color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400 of FIG. 43 to emit light based on the various commands of FIGS. 118 and 119 from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 of FIG. The display of various images is displayed in the display area of, and the progress of the effect is controlled. The pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 can be operated by a player.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400 in FIG. 43 and the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194 in FIG. The piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400, which is a power generation unit, can generate electric power from an impact due to the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. The electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194 as a power storage means can charge and discharge the power generated by the piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400 as the power generation means.

  The peripheral control board 4140 is a message MGA in FIG. 154 (b), a message MGB in FIG. 154 (c), and a liquid crystal display, which are screens for prompting the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. 155 (d) and (e) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in 1900, and the specific effect proceeds, and the player operates the operation unit 400 for the purpose of advancing the specific effect. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194 as the power storage unit can charge the power generated by the piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400 as the power generation unit by the operation. I have.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the power charged by the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194 serving as a power storage unit is discharged to discharge the color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400 serving as a light emitter. , The color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400, which is a light emitter, can emit light.

  As described above, the image that informs the user of the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player presses the operation unit 400 for the purpose of performing the specific effect. When the operation unit 405 is operated, the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194 as the power storage unit can charge the power generated by the piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400 as the power generation unit by the operation. . As a result, if the pachinko hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed is powered down due to an electrical trouble, or if a power outage occurs due to an emergency in the event of a disaster, and the pachinko hall goes black, The power charged by the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194, which is a means, is discharged and supplied to the color LEDs 430b, 432d of the operation unit 400, which is a light emitter, so that the color LEDs 430b, 432d of the operation unit 400, which is a light emitter, are discharged. Since the light emitting device can emit light, the color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400, which is the light emitting body, are used to move the player out of the concourse or pachinko hall when the pachinko hall becomes completely dark due to a power failure. It can function as an emergency light as an evacuation mark It has become. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention can be used as a mark for evacuating the player to the concourse or the outside of the pachinko hall when the pachinko hall becomes completely dark due to a power failure.

[17. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment at all, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine, for example, a slot machine or The present invention can also be applied to an integrated gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine are integrated (a slot game using a game ball).

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine (game machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Main frame, 4 ... Game board, 5 ... Door frame, 130 ... Side speaker, 222 ... Upper right speaker, 262 ... Upper left speaker, 821 ... Lower part Speaker, 400 operation unit, 401 dial operation unit, 405 pressing operation unit, 1100 game area, 1900 liquid crystal display device (effect display means), 2101 upper starting port, 2102 lower starting port, 4100 main Control board (main control means), 4100a main control MPU, 4110 payout control board, 4110b power failure monitoring circuit, 4140 peripheral control board (production control means), 4140a volume control volume, 4150 peripheral control section, 4150c ... Peripheral control RAM, 4160 ... Liquid crystal and sound control unit, 4160a ... VDP with built-in sound source, 4170 ... Lamp drive board, 4180 ... Motor Dynamic board.

Claims (1)

A plurality of sound output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state to the gaming machine, and a staging sound due to the progress of the game,
Effect display means,
First volume adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means;
Effect control means for controlling the audio output means and the effect display means according to schedule data extracted based on an effect command from the main control means,
A second volume adjustment unit different from the first volume adjustment unit that can adjust a volume output from the audio output unit;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery start condition,
Based on the lottery result of the lottery means, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special game state in which a profit is given to a player and that can discharge game balls to the outside,
Of the first volume adjustment unit and the second volume adjustment unit, the first volume adjustment unit is an adjustment unit that cannot be operated by a player,
The effect control means,
Production sound volume adjustment control means for setting the volume of the production sound in accordance with the operation of the first volume adjustment means,
In the special game state, effect sound volume change control means for changing the sound volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means according to the operation of the second volume adjustment means,
When the initialization condition is satisfied, effect sound initialization control means for setting the sound volume of the effect sound changed by the effect sound volume change control means to an initial volume independent of the setting of the player,
Notification sound volume adjustment control means for setting the volume of the notification sound for notifying the abnormal state to the gaming machine in the abnormality notification period based on the abnormal state without depending on the volume set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means When,
Sound output execution control means for executing control to output the effect sound and the notification sound from the sound output means,
When the abnormality notification period occurred during the game, the progress of the sound generation schedule data of the effect sound output from the audio output unit was continued without stopping according to the sound generation schedule data of the schedule data. When the volume is changed to mute in the state, and the abnormal notification period elapses after a predetermined period, the mute is set to mute after the abnormal notification period occurs, and the progress is continued according to the sound generation schedule data. If the sound volume of the effect sound has been changed by the effect sound volume change control means in response to an operation on the second volume adjusting means before the occurrence of the abnormality notification period, the effect sound volume change control means sets By setting the volume to be restored to the previously set volume, the effect sound whose volume is set to mute in response to the occurrence of the abnormality notification period Are configured to be restored in a predetermined time advanced state from being changed set to mute,
The notification sound volume adjustment control means,
A state in which the effect sound volume adjustment control means sets the sound volume of the effect sound low in response to the operation of the first volume adjustment means, or the effect sound volume change control means responds to the operation of the second volume adjustment means. In a state in which the volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means has been changed to a smaller volume, a larger volume than the volume of the effect sound is set as the volume of the notification sound,
When a new abnormality occurs in the abnormality notification period, and even after the end of the abnormality notification period due to the notification of the previous abnormality, if the abnormality notification period due to the occurrence of the new abnormality continues, Without restoring the volume of the production sound, the progress of the sound generation schedule data of the production sound is continued while the production sound is muted until the abnormality notification period due to the new abnormality ends,
The sound output execution control means,
In the abnormal notification period, the notification sound and the effect sound whose sound has been muted are synthesized, and the notification sound is output so as to be audible.